LG HT935TAW Owner's manual

LG HT935TAW Owner's manual
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻚ‬
‫ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ﺩﻱ ﰲ ﺩﻱ‬
‫ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﺍﻻﻃﻼﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﻟﻚ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺟﻴﺪﹰ ﺍ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ ﻭﺍﻻﺣﺘﻔﺎﻅ ﺑﻪ ﻟﻠﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻴﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻘﺒﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﺮﺍﺯ‬
‫)‪HT935TAW (HT935TAW, SH95TA-F/ S/ C/ W, W95‬‬
‫‪P/NO : MFL65989712‬‬
‫‪3:27:27‬‬
‫‪2010-04-26‬‬
‫‪HT905TAW-AL_DARELLK_ARA_9712.indd 1‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻥ‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻥ‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻥ‬
‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ‬
‫ﺧﻄﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﺼﺪﻣﺔ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻣﻤﻨﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺢ‬
‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ‪ :‬ﻟﻠﺘﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻄﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﺼﺪﻣﺔ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﻔﻚ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎﺀ )ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺠﺰﺀ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ( ﻻ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﺃﺟﺰﺍﺀ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ‬
‫ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺻﻴﺎﻧﺘﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﺎﻧﺔ ﺑﻤﻮﻇﻔﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﺎﻧﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺼﻴﻦ ﻟﻠﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻴﺎﻧﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻬﺪﻑ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻲﺀ ﻫﺬﺍ ‪ -‬ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻱ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺭﺃﺱ ﺳﻬﻢ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﻣﺜﻠﺚ ﻣﺘﺴﺎﻭﻱ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺿﻼﻉ ‪ -‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺟﻬﺪ‬
‫ﻛﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻲ ﺧﻄﻴﺮ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﻣﺎﺩﺓ ﻣﻌﺰﻭﻟﺔ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻨﺪﻭﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻭﻱ ﻟﻠﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪ ،‬ﻭﻫﻮ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻔﻲ ﻟﺘﺸﻜﻴﻞ ﺧﻄﺮ ﻳﻨﺒﺊ‬
‫ﺑﺤﺪﻭﺙ ﺻﺪﻣﺔ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻷﻱ ﺷﺨﺺ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻬﺪﻑ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺠﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺑﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﻣﺜﻠﺚ‬
‫ﻣﺘﺴﺎﻭﻱ ﺍﻷﺿﻼﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺑﻮﺟﻮﺩ‬
‫ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﺻﻴﺎﻧﺔ )ﺧﺪﻣﺔ( ﻫﺎﻣﺔ ﺿﻤﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ‪ :‬ﻟﺘﺠﻨﺐ ﺧﻄﺮ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ ﺃﻭ ﺻﺪﻣﺔ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻻ‬
‫ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻟﻠﻤﻄﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺮﻃﻮﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ‪ :‬ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺿﻴﻖ ﻛﺨﺰﺍﻧﺔ‬
‫ﻛﺘﺐ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻱ ﻗﻄﻌﺔ ﺃﺛﺎﺙ ﻣﺸﺎﺑﻬﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ‪ :‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻟﻠﻤﺎﺀ )ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺴﺎﻗﻂ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻨﺎﺛﺮ(‪،‬‬
‫ﻭﻋﺪﻡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺃﺷﻴﺎﺀ ﻣﻤﺘﻠﺌﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺴﻮﺍﺋﻞ ﻛﺄﻭﺍﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺰﻫﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ ﺑﺨﺼﻮﺹ ﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﰊ‬
‫ﻳﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﻮﺿﻊ ﻣﻌﻈﻢ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺩﺍﺋﺮﺓ ﻣﺨﺼﺼﺔ؛‬
‫ﺑﻤﻌﻨﻰ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺋﺮﺓ ﺫﺍﺕ ﻣﻨﻔﺬ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻻ ﺗﺰﻭﺩ ﺳﻮ￯ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‬
‫ﻓﻘﻂ ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻭﻟﻴﺲ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺃﻳﺔ ﻣﻨﺎﻓﺬ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺩﻭﺍﺋﺮ ﻓﺮﻋﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﻟﻚ ﺯﻳﺎﺩ ﹰﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﹸﺤﻤﻞ ﻣﻨﺎﻓﺬ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﺤﺎﺋﻂ ﻓﻮﻕ ﻃﺎﻗﺘﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻣﻨﺎﻓﺬ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﺤﺎﺋﻂ‬
‫ﻻﺗ ﹼ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺤﻤﻞ ﻓﻮﻕ ﻃﺎﻗﺘﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻨﺎﻓﺬ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﺤﺎﺋﻂ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺳﻼﻙ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻄﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻜﻮﻛﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻔﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﺳﻼﻙ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻮﺍﺯﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺳﻼﻙ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻔﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺮﻭﺧﺔ ﺗﹸﻌﺘﺒﺮ ﻣﺼﺎﺩﺭ ﺧﻄﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﻨﺠﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻦ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻻﺕ ﺻﺪﻣﺔ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺮﻳ ﹰﻘﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻓﺘﺮﺍﺕ ﻣﻨﺘﻈﻤﺔ ﺑﻔﺤﺺ ﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ‬
‫ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﺗﻀﺢ ﻣﻦ ﺷﻜﻠﻪ ﺃﻧﻪ ﺗﺎﻟﻒ ﺃﻭ ﻓﺎﺳﺪ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻢ ﺑﻨﺰﻋﻪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﺲ‬
‫ﻭﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﻋﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻭﺍﺟﻌﻞ ﺃﺧﺼﺎﺋﻲ ﺻﻴﺎﻧﺔ ﻣﻌﺘﻤﺪ‬
‫ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻚ ﺑﻘﻄﻌﺔ ﻏﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻀﺒﻮﻃﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﻨﺠﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻦ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻻﺕ ﺻﺪﻣﺔ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺮﻳ ﹰﻘﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻓﺘﺮﺍﺕ ﻣﻨﺘﻈﻤﺔ ﺑﻔﺤﺺ ﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ‬
‫ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﺗﻀﺢ ﻣﻦ ﺷﻜﻠﻪ ﺃﻧﻪ ﺗﺎﻟﻒ ﺃﻭ ﻓﺎﺳﺪ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻢ ﺑﻨﺰﻋﻪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﺲ‬
‫ﻭﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﻋﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻭﺍﺟﻌﻞ ﺃﺧﺼﺎﺋﻲ ﺻﻴﺎﻧﺔ ﻣﻌﺘﻤﺪ‬
‫ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻚ ﺑﻘﻄﻌﺔ ﻏﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻀﺒﻮﻃﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺤﺐ ﻟﻠﺨﺎﺭﺝ ﻗﺎﺑﺲ‬
‫ﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺳﻬﻮﻟﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﺲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ‪ :‬ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺃﻧﻈﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻴﺰﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻀﻤﺎﻥ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻴﻢ ﻟﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪ ،‬ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﻗﺮﺍﺀﺓ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺑﻌﻨﺎﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻻﺣﺘﻔﺎﻅ ﺑﻪ ﻟﻠﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻴﻪ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﺒ ﹰ‬
‫ﻼ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﺣﺘﺎﺟﺖ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﺎﻧﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺗﺼﻞ ﺑﻤﺮﻛﺰ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﻣﻌﺘﻤﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﻨﺘﺞ ﻋﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀﺍﺕ ﻏﻴﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻫﻨﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﺷﻌﺎﻉ ﺧﻄﻴﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﺠﻨﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﻟﺸﻌﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻠﻴﺰﺭ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﺗﺤﺎﻭﻝ ﻓﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻨﺪﻭﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻭﻱ ﻟﻠﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺼﺪﺭ ﺷﻌﺎﻉ ﻟﻴﺰﺭ ﻣﺮﺋﻲ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻓﺘﺤﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﺤﺪﻕ ﻓﻲ ﺷﻌﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻠﻴﺰﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪3:27:36‬‬
‫‪2010-04-26‬‬
‫‪HT905TAW-AL_DARELLK_ARA_9712.indd 2‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻥ‬
‫ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ‪ :‬ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺿﻴﻖ ﻛﺨﺰﺍﻧﺔ‬
‫ﻛﺘﺐ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻱ ﻗﻄﻌﺔ ﺃﺛﺎﺙ ﻣﺸﺎﺑﻬﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪T‬ﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﺰﻭﺩ ﺑﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﺤﻤﻮﻟﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﺨﺘﺰﻧﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﻨﺔ ﻹﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﳎﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳉﻬﺎﺯ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﺰﻉ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﻳﻤﺔ ﻭﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺑﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﻋﻜﺴﻲ ﻟﻠﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ‪ .‬ﻟﺘﺠﻨﺐ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺚ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﺔ ﻭﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺻﺤﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻧﺴﺎﻥ ﻭﺍﻟﺤﻴﻮﺍﻥ ﻟﻠﺨﻄﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻤﻞ‪ ،‬ﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﻳﻤﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﻋﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻤﻼﺋﻢ ﻭﺗﺨﻠﺺ ﻣﻨﻪ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺠﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﻟﺬﻟﻚ‪ .‬ﺗﺨﻠﺺ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻔﺎﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺮ￯‪ .‬ﻳﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﻭﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﻣﺨﺘﺰﻧﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻸﻧﻈﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻴﺔ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻻ ﻳﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺷﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺃﺷﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺲ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻳﻖ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺎ ﺷﺎﺑﻪ ﺫﻟﻚ‪.‬‬
‫‪3:27:36‬‬
‫‪2010-04-26‬‬
‫ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻨﺸﺮ‬
‫ﳛﻈﺮ ﺑﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻧﻮﻥ ﻧﺴﺦ ﺃﻭ ﺑﺚ ﺃﻭ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺒﺚ ﻋﱪ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺑﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺄﺟﲑ ﺍﳌﻮﺍﺩ ﺍﳌﺤﻤﻴﺔ ﺑﺤﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻨﴩ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺗﺮﺧﻴﺺ‪ .‬ﳛﺘﻮﻱ ﻫﺬﺍ‬
‫ﺍﳌﻨﺘﺞ ﻋﲆ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﳊﲈﻳﺔ ﺿﺪ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﺍﳌﻄﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﴍﻛﺔ ‪Macrovi-‬‬
‫‪ .sion‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﳊﲈﻳﺔ ﺿﺪ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﻋﲆ ﺑﻌﺾ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ‪ .‬ﻭﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺻﻮﺭﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ‬
‫ﹰ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻮﻳﺸﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻀﻤﻦ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﳌﻨﺘﺞ ﺗﻜﻨﻮﻟﻮﺟﻴﺎ ﲪﺎﻳﺔ ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﻃﺒﻊ ﺍﳌﺤﻤﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺑﻤﻮﺟﺐ ﺑﺮﺍﺀﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﺧﱰﺍﻉ ﺍﻷﻣﲑﻛﻴﺔ ﻭﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﳌﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻜﺮﻳﺔ ﺍﻷﺧﺮ￯‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺮﺧﺼﺎ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺒﻞ‬
‫ﳚﺐ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﻜﻨﻮﻟﻮﺟﻴﺎ ﲪﺎﻳﺔ ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻨﴩ‬
‫ﹰ‬
‫ﴍﻛﺔ ‪ ،Macrovision‬ﻭﳐﺼﺼﺔ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﳌﻨﺰﱄ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻷﺧﺮ￯ ﺍﳌﺤﺪﻭﺩﺓ ﻓﻘﻂ‪ ،‬ﻣﺎ ﱂ ﺗﺮﺧﺺ ﴍﻛﺔ ‪Macrovision‬‬
‫ﺑﺨﻼﻑ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ .‬ﲢﻈﺮ ﺍﳍﻨﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻜﺴﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻔﻜﻴﻚ ﺍﳉﻬﺎﺯ‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻥ‬
‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ‪ :‬ﻻ ﺗﺴﺪ ﺃﻳ ﹰﺎ ﻣﻦ ﻓﺘﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻮﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻭﻓﻘ ﹰﺎ‬
‫ﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻨﻌﺔ‪ .‬ﺗﻬﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻓﺬ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻬﻴﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻮﻳﺔ ﻭﺿﻤﺎﻥ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺟﻴﺪ ﻟﻠﻤﻨﺘﺞ‬
‫ﻭﺣﻤﺎﻳﺘﻪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺴﺨﻮﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﺋﺪﺓ‪ .‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻻ ﺗﹸﺴﺪ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻣﻄﻠﻘ ﹰﺎ ﺑﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺭﻳﻜﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺒﺴﺎﻁ ﺃﻭ ﻏﻴﺮ‬
‫ﺫﻟﻚ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﺳﻄﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﺑﻬﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺣﻴﺰ ﻣﺪﻣﺞ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺧﺰﺍﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺐ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺭﻓﻒ ﺇﻻ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﺗﻬﻮﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺟﻴﺪﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻻﻟﺘﺰﺍﻡ ﺑﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻨﻌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫ﻳﻨﺒﻐﻲ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻼﺣﻆ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻬﻠﻜﻮﻥ ﺃﻥ ﲨﻴﻊ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ‬
‫ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﲤﺎ ﹰﻣﺎ ﻣﻊ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﳌﻨﺘﺞ ﻭﻗﺪ ﺗﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﰲ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺯﻳﻒ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ‬
‫ﻣﺸﺎﻛﻞ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﳌﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﺰﺍﻳﺪﻱ ‪ 525‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ،625‬ﻳﻮﴅ ﺑﺄﻥ ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺑﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺇﱃ ﺧﺮﺝ ”ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻴﺔ“‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺗﺴﺎﺅﻻﺕ‬
‫ﺑﺨﺼﻮﺹ ﺗﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ ﺍﳋﺎﺹ ﺑﻨﺎ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻮﺩﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ‪525p‬‬
‫ﻭ‪ ،625p‬ﻓﱪﺟﺎﺀ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻤﺮﻛﺰ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻼﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺑﻊ ﻟﻨﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﳚﺐ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﻋﲆ ]‪) [Mastered‬ﻣﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻴﻪ( ﳉﻌﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻣﺸﻐﻼﺕ ‪ LG‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﳋﻴﺎﺭ ﻋﲆ ‪) Live File System‬ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﳌﻠﻔﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﳊﻲ(‪ ،‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﻣﻊ ﻣﺸﻐﻼﺕ ‪) .LG‬ﻣﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻴﻪ‪/‬‬
‫ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﳌﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﻲ‪ :‬ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪Windows‬‬
‫‪(Vista‬‬
‫‪HT905TAW-AL_DARELLK_ARA_9712.indd 3‬‬
‫ﺍﳌﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫ﺍﳌﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻥ‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻀﻴﺮ‬
‫‪6‬‬
‫ﺳﻤﺎﺕ ﻓﺮﻳﺪﺓ‬
‫‪7‬‬
‫ﻣﻘﺪﻣﺔ‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪7‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫‪7‬‬
‫ﺣﻮﻝ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺭﻣﺰ [‬
‫‪7‬‬
‫ﺭﻣﻮﺯ ﺍﳌﻨﻄﻘﺔ‬
‫‪7‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﰲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺷﺮﻭﻁ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫‪8‬‬
‫‪9‬‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‬
‫‪ 11‬ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ‬
‫‪ 12‬ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ‬
‫‪5‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ‬
‫‪ 13‬ﺗﺠﻤﻴﻊ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻜﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻜﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪6‬‬
‫‪ 14‬ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‬
‫‪15‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻣﻜﱪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 17‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‬
‫‪ 18‬ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ‬
‫‪7‬‬
‫‪18‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻣﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫‪20‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫‪19‬‬
‫‪21‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﳐﺮﺝ ‪HDMI‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﻴﲔ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ‬
‫‪ 21‬ﺩﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺈﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫‪ 22‬ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫‪22‬‬
‫‪22‬‬
‫‪23‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ‪USB‬‬
‫‪24‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ‪OPTICAL IN‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ‪AUX IN‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﳏﻤﻮﻝ ‪?AUDIO IN‬‬
‫)‪(PORT. IN‬‬
‫‪ 25‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫‪25‬‬
‫‪2010-04-26‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪5‬ﻏﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﲆ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪:‬‬
‫‪25‬‬
‫ﻹﻇﻬﺎﺭ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ )‪ (Setup Menu‬ﻭﺍﳋﺮﻭﺝ‬
‫‪26‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ‬
‫‪27‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
‫‪26‬‬
‫‪28‬‬
‫‪29‬‬
‫ﻣﻨﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺇﻏﻼﻕ )ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﴘ(‬
‫ﺃﺷﻴﺎﺀ ﺃﺧﺮ￯‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ‬
‫‪ 30‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ )‪(Home Menu‬‬
‫‪ 30‬ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ‬
‫‪ 31‬ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺮ￯‬
‫‪31‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﻋﲆ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫‪32‬‬
‫ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺩﻱ ﰲ ﺩﻱ‬
‫‪32‬‬
‫‪32‬‬
‫‪32‬‬
‫‪32‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﻱ ﰲ ﺩﻱ )‪(DVD Menu‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪ DVD‬ﺑﴪﻋﺔ ‪ 1.5‬ﻣﺮﺓ‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻒ‬
‫ﺑﺪﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺯﻣﻨﻴﺔ ﳏﺪﺩﺓ‬
‫‪32‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺌﻨﺎﻑ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫‪33‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﲑ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﱰﲨﺔ‬
‫‪34‬‬
‫ﺍﳋﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫‪33‬‬
‫‪34‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬
‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺻﻮﺭ ‪JPG‬‬
‫‪35‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻡ‬
‫‪35‬‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻣﺆﻗﺘﺎ‬
‫‪35‬‬
‫‪35‬‬
‫‪35‬‬
‫‪35‬‬
‫‪3:27:37‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ‬
‫‪ 24‬ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺋﻲ‬
‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ‬
‫‪6‬‬
‫‪22‬‬
‫ﺍﻻﺳﺘﲈﻉ ﺇﱃ ﺍﳌﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺸﻐﻞ ﺍﳌﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﺍﳌﺤﻤﻮﻝ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﳐﻔﻒ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﺀﺓ‬
‫ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﳌﺸﻬﺪ ﺍﻷﺧﲑ‬
‫ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ‪ -‬ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻱ‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺴﺘﻮ￯ ﺍﻟﺴﲈﻋﺔ‬
‫‪HT905TAW-AL_DARELLK_ARA_9712.indd 4‬‬
‫ﺍﳌﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬
‫‪35‬‬
‫ﺍﻓﺾ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
‫‪36‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﳏﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺩﻳﻮ ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺎ‬
‫‪36‬‬
‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﳏﻄﺔ ﳏﻔﻮﻇﺔ‬
‫‪5‬‬
‫‪ 36‬ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺫﺍﻋﺔ‬
‫‪36‬‬
‫‪36‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﺢ ﻛﻞ ﺍﳌﺤﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺤﻔﻮﻇﺔ‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫ﲢﺴﲔ ﺍﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ﺇﻑ ﺇﻡ ‪FM‬‬
‫‪ 37‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
‫‪37‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ "ﳏﻴﻄﻲ"‬
‫‪38‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺇﱃ "‪"USB‬‬
‫‪39‬‬
‫ﺍﻻﺳﺘﲈﻉ ﺇﱃ ﺍﳌﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ‬
‫‪ 38‬ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ‬
‫‪ 39‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﻜﻨﻮﻟﻮﺟﻴﺎ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‬
‫‪40‬‬
‫ﺍﻻﺳﺘﲈﻉ ﺇﱃ ﺍﳌﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﻣﻦ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ‬
‫‪41‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﺍﳌﻮﺻﻞ‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻴﺎﻧﺔ‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫‪ 42‬ﻣﻠﺤﻮﻇﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ‬
‫‪ 42‬ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‬
‫‪5‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻜﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﳌﺸﻜﻼﺕ ﻭﺇﺻﻼﺣﻬﺎ‬
‫‪ 43‬ﺍﺳﺘﻜﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻜﻼﺕ ﻭﺇﺻﻼﺣﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻣﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫‪6‬‬
‫‪ 44‬ﺭﻣﻮﺯ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ‬
‫‪ 45‬ﺭﻣﻮﺯ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ‬
‫‪ 46‬ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺧﻴﺺ‬
‫‪7‬‬
‫‪ 47‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ‬
‫‪3:27:37‬‬
‫‪2010-04-26‬‬
‫‪HT905TAW-AL_DARELLK_ARA_9712.indd 5‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻀﲑ‬
‫‪6‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻀﲑ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻀﲑ‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫ﺳﲈﺕ ﻓﺮﻳﺪﺓ‬
‫ﺍﳌﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻣﺤﻤﻮﻝ‬
‫ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ ﻭﻓﺤﺼﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻤﻊ ﻟﻠﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ ﺍﳌﺤﻤﻮﻝ‪،MP3) .‬ﺍﳊﺎﺳﻮﺏ‬
‫ﺍﳌﺤﻤﻮﻝ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺦ(‬
‫ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﺒﺎﴍ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪USB‬‬
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺮﺹ ﻣﻀﻐﻮﻁ ﺇﱃ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪.USB‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻳﺲ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺎﻋﺪﻱ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻋﺎﱄ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺒﺎﻧﺔ‬
‫ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺳﱰﻳﻮ ﺑﻘﺎﺑﺲ ﺻﻐﲑ‪.‬‬
‫)‪(1‬‬
‫ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪(1) HDMI‬‬
‫ﺷﺎﻫﺪ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ‪ HD‬ﻛﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﺑﺈﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺑﺴﻴﻂ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﻜﱪ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﳌﻨﺰﻟﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺳﺘﲈﻉ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻷﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ ﻭﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ‪ DVD‬ﻭﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﰲ ﻧﻤﻂ ﻧﺸﻂ‪ 2.1) 5.1‬ﺃﻭ ‪.ch (2.0‬‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ)‪(1‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ )‪(2‬‬
‫‪ FM‬ﻫﻮﺍﺋﻲ )‪(1‬‬
‫‪ AM‬ﻫﻮﺍﺋﻲ )‪(1‬‬
‫ﻛﺎﺑﻼﺕ ﻣﻜﱪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
‫)‪(6‬‬
‫‪3:27:37‬‬
‫‪2010-04-26‬‬
‫‪HT905TAW-AL_DARELLK_ARA_9712.indd 6‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻀﲑ‬
‫ﻣﻘﺪﻣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﰲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫‪)DVD-VIDEO‬ﻗﺮﺹ ‪ 8‬ﺳﻢ‪ 12/‬ﺳﻢ(‬
‫ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﴍﺍﺅﻫﺎ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺗﺄﺟﲑﻫﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪) DVD±R‬ﻗﺮﺹ ‪ 8‬ﺳﻢ‪ 12/‬ﺳﻢ(‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻴﺎﻏﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ‬
‫‪) DVD-RW‬ﻗﺮﺹ ‪ 8‬ﺳﻢ‪ 12/‬ﺳﻢ(‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻴﺎﻏﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ‬
‫‪ :DVD+R‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻓﻘﻂ‬
‫ﻳﺪﻋﻢ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺫﻭ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻘﺘﲔ ﹰ‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ‬
‫‪) DVD+RW‬ﻗﺮﺹ ‪ 8‬ﺳﻢ‪ 12/‬ﺳﻢ(‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻓﻘﻂ‬
‫ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﳌﻀﻐﻮﻁ ‪ :‬ﺍﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ‬
‫ﺍﳌﺪﳎﺔ ﺃﻭ ‪ CD-R/ CD-RW‬ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ‬
‫ﺍﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﺍﳌﺪﳎﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﴍﺍﺋﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﻮﻝ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺭﻣﺰ [‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ” [ “ ﻋﲆ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﻳﺸﲑ ﺇﱃ ﺃﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﴍﺣﻬﺎ ﰲ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻚ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻏﲑ ﻣﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﰲ ﻗﺮﺹ‬
‫ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪ DVD‬ﻣﻌﻲ‬
‫‪3:27:38‬‬
‫ﲨﻴﻊ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﻭﺍﳌﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‬
‫‪ALL‬‬
‫ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ‪MP3‬‬
‫‪MP3‬‬
‫‪ DVD‬ﻭ‪ DVD±R/RW‬ﺍﳌﺼﺎﻏﺔ ﳖﺎﺋﻴ ﹰﺎ‬
‫‪DVD‬‬
‫ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ‪WMA‬‬
‫‪WMA‬‬
‫ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ‪DivX‬‬
‫‪DivX‬‬
‫ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﳌﻀﻐﻮﻃﺔ‬
‫‪ACD‬‬
‫ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ‪JPG‬‬
‫‪JPG‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻀﲑ‬
‫ﻗﻮﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪ DVD±R/ RW‬ﻭ‪CD-R/ RW‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﳛﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﲆ ﻋﻨﺎﻭﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻭ‪/‬ﺃﻭ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ‪ DivX‬ﻭ‪/‬ﺃﻭ‬
‫‪ MP3‬ﻭ‪/‬ﺃﻭ ‪ WMA‬ﻭ‪/‬ﺃﻭ ‪ .JPEG‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﻌﺾ‬
‫ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ‪ DVD±RW/ DVD±R‬ﺃﻭ ‪CD-RW/ CD-R‬‬
‫ﰲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺰﻳﻘﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻠﻘﺮﺹ ﺃﻭ ﺧﺼﺎﺋﺺ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻭﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻹﻧﺸﺎﺀ‪.‬‬
‫‪2010-04-26‬‬
‫‪7‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫ﻳﺸﲑ ﺇﱃ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﻭﺧﺼﺎﺋﺺ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫‪TIP‬‬
‫ﻳﺸﲑ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﺇﱃ ﺟﻌﻞ ﺍﳌﻬﻤﺔ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﺳﻬﻮﻟﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﲢﺬﻳﺮ‬
‫ﻳﺸﲑ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺬﻳﺮﺍﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﻣﻨﻊ ﻭﻗﻮﻉ ﺃﴐﺍﺭ ﳏﺘﻤﻠﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺟﺮﺍﺀ‬
‫ﺇﺳﺎﺀﺓ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﲈﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﻣﻮﺯ ﺍﳌﻨﻄﻘﺔ‬
‫ﲢﺘﻮﻱ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻋﲆ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﳌﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﻣﻄﺒﻮﻋ ﹰﺎ ﻋﲆ ﺍﳉﺰﺀ ﺍﳋﻠﻔﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﻄﻴﻊ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺇﻻ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ‪ DVD‬ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﳌﻠﺼﻖ ﺍﳌﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﰲ ﻣﺆﺧﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ”‪) “ALL‬ﲨﻴﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ(‪.‬‬
‫• ﲢﺘﻮﻱ ﻣﻌﻈﻢ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ‪ DVD‬ﻋﲆ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻛﺮﻭﻱ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﺑﺪﺍﺧﻠﻪ‬
‫ﺭﻗﻢ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺑﻮﺿﻮﺡ ﻋﲆ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎﺀ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻﺑﺪ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﳌﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﳌﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﲆ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‪ ،‬ﻭﺇﻻ‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﻌﺬﺭ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﺣﺎﻭﻟﺖ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻗﺮﺹ ‪ DVD‬ﺑﻪ ﺭﻣﺰ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﳐﺘﻠﻒ‬
‫ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﺍﳌﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﲆ ﺍﳌﺸﻐﻞ ﺍﳋﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ‬
‫”‪) “Check Regional Code‬ﲢﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﳌﻨﻄﻘﺔ( ﻋﲆ‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ‪.‬‬
‫‪HT905TAW-AL_DARELLK_ARA_9712.indd 7‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻀﲑ‬
‫‪8‬‬
‫ﴍﻭﻁ ﺍﳌﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻣﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎﺕ ﻣﻠﻒ ‪DivX‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺗﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻗﺮﺹ ‪ DivX‬ﻣﻊ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﳌﺸﻐﻞ ﻋﲆ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ‪:‬‬
‫• ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﺎﺡ‪) 720 x 576 :‬ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ × ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ( ﺑﻜﺴﻞ‬
‫ﻣﺘﻄﻠﺐ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ ﺍﳌﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ‪MP3/ WMA‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻗﺮﺹ ‪ MP3/ WMA‬ﻣﻊ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﳏﺪﻭﺩ ﻛﲈ ﻳﲇ ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻀﲑ‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﻲ‪ :‬ﺿﻤﻦ ‪ 32‬ﺇﱃ ‪ 48‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﻫﺮﺗﺰ )‪ ،(MP3‬ﺿﻤﻦ‬
‫‪ 32‬ﺇﱃ ‪ 48‬ﻛﻴﻞ ﻫﺮﺗﺰ )‪.(WMA‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﺖ‪ :‬ﺿﻤﻦ ‪ 32‬ﺇﱃ ‪ 320‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﺑﺖ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬
‫)‪ ،(MP3‬ﺿﻤﻦ ‪ 40‬ﺇﻝ ‪ 192‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﺑﺖ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬
‫)‪.(WMA‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﳌﺪﻋﻮﻡ ‪v9، v8، v7، v2 :‬‬
‫ﺍﳊﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﴡ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﻠﻔﺎﺕ‪ :‬ﺃﻗﻞ ﻣﻦ ‪.999‬‬
‫ﺇﻣﺘﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ ‪“mp3”/ “.wma.” :‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﳌﻀﻐﻮﻁ‪ISO9660/ JOLIET :‬‬
‫ﻳﻔﻀﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪ Easy-CD Creator‬ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻘﻮﻡ‬
‫ﺑﺈﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ‪.ISO 9660‬‬
‫ﻣﺘﻄﻠﺐ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻣﻊ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﳏﺪﻭ ﹰﺩﺍ ﻋﲆ ﺍﻟﻨﺤﻮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺎﱄ‪:‬‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﺍﳊﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﴡ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪:‬‬
‫‪ 2 760 x 2 048‬ﺑﻜﺴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﳊﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﴡ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﻠﻔﺎﺕ‪ :‬ﺃﻗﻞ ﻣﻦ ‪.999‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﳐﺘﻠﻒ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻣﺘﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ ‪“jpg.” :‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﳌﻀﻐﻮﻁ‪:‬‬
‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺗﺮﲨﺔ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ‪ DivX‬ﰲ ﺣﺪﻭﺩ ‪ 45‬ﺣﺮﻑ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺭﻣﺰ ﹰﺍ ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻋﺮﺿﻪ ﰲ ﻣﻠﻒ ‪ ،DivX‬ﻓﺴﻴﻈﻬﺮ‬
‫ﻛﻌﻼﻣﺔ » _ » ﻋﲆ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ :‬ﺃﻗﻞ ﻣﻦ ‪ 30‬ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﱂ ﻳﻜﻦ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﻓﺎﺻﻞ ﺑﲔ ﺑﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﰲ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ‬
‫ﺍﳌﺴﺠﻞ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻭﻟﻴﺲ ﻛﻼﳘﺎ‬
‫ﻣﻌ ﹰﺎ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻣﻠﻒ ‪ DivX‬ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﻟﻠﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪avi "، ".mpg "،،." :‬‬
‫‪"".mpeg "، ".divx‬‬
‫• ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﱰﲨﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﻟﻠﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪:‬‬
‫‪SubRip (*.srt/ *.txt), SAMI (*.smi),‬‬
‫‪SubStation Alpha (*.ssa/ *.txt),‬‬
‫‪MicroDVD (*.sub/ *.txt), SubViewer 2.0‬‬
‫)‪(*.sub/ *.txt), VobSub(*.sub‬‬
‫• ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪ Codec‬ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﻟﻠﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪:‬‬
‫‪“DIVX3.xx”, “DIVX4.xx”, “DIVX5.xx”,‬‬
‫‪“MP4V3”, “3IVX”.‬‬
‫• ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﻟﻠﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪“WMA” :‬‬
‫‪.“MP3”، “PCM”، “AC3” ،‬‬
‫• ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﻲ‪ :‬ﺿﻤﻦ ‪ 32‬ﺇﱃ ‪ 48‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﻫﺮﺗﺰ )‪ ،(MP3‬ﺿﻤﻦ‬
‫‪ 32‬ﺇﱃ ‪ 48‬ﻛﻴﻞ ﻫﺮﺗﺰ )‪.(WMA‬‬
‫• ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﺖ‪ :‬ﺿﻤﻦ ‪ 32‬ﺇﱃ ‪ 320‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﺑﺖ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬
‫)‪ ،(MP3‬ﺿﻤﻦ ‪ 40‬ﺇﻝ ‪ 192‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﺑﺖ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬
‫)‪.(WMA‬‬
‫• ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻸﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺍﳌﻨﺴﻘﺔ ﰲ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﳌﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺒﺎﴍ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﰲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﳌﺸﻐﻞ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﳐﺘﻠﻔﺎ ﻋﻦ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﱰﲨﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺮﺑﲈ‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﱰﲨﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﻗﺮﺍﺀﺓ ﻣﻠﻒ ‪.DivX‬‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻠﻒ ‪ DivX‬ﳐﺘﻠﻒ ﻋﻦ ‪،DivXspec‬‬
‫ﻓﻘﺪ ﻻ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪3:27:38‬‬
‫‪2010-04-26‬‬
‫‪HT905TAW-AL_DARELLK_ARA_9712.indd 8‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻀﲑ‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‬
‫‪9‬‬
‫‪ :t RADIO&INPUT‬ﻳﻐﲑ ﻣﺼﺎﺩﺭ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ‪.‬‬
‫• • • • • • • • • ‪• • • • • • • • b‬‬
‫‪ 0‬ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ‪ 0‬ﺇﻝ ‪ :‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﳋﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﺮﻗﻤﺔ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ : CLEAR‬ﹸﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﰲ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍ ﹸﳌﻤﻴﺰﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﺮﻭﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‬
‫‪a‬‬
‫‪ : s REPEAT‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪) .‬ﻋﺸﻮﺍﺋﻲ‪ ،‬ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ(‬
‫• • • • • • • • • ‪• • • • • • • • c‬‬
‫‪ : m/M SCAN‬ﻟﻠﺒﺤﺚ ﻟﻠﺨﻠﻒ ﺃﻭ ﻟﻸﻣﺎﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻀﲑ‬
‫‪b‬‬
‫‪ : . / > SKIP‬ﺍﺫﻫﺐ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ‪ /‬ﺍﳌﺴﺎﺭ ‪ /‬ﺍﳌﻠﻒ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﱄ‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪ : (STOP) x‬ﻳﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪c‬‬
‫‪ : B (PLAY)، MONO/STEREO‬ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ .‬ﳛﺪﺩ‬
‫‪.Mono/ Stereo‬‬
‫‪d‬‬
‫• • • • • • • • • ‪• • • • • • • • d‬‬
‫‪: (PAUSE/STEP) X‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﺆﻗﺘﹰﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :SPEAKER LEVEL‬ﻳﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮ￯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﳌﻜﱪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
‫ﺍﳌﺮﻏﻮﺏ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :SOUND EFFECT‬ﳜﺘﺎﺭ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﳌﺆﺛﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﰐ‪.‬‬
‫‪e‬‬
‫‪ : +/- VOL‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮ￯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :OPTICAL‬ﻳﻐﲑ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﴫﻱ ﻣﺒﺎﴍﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ : MUTE‬ﻟﻜﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﰲ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‬
‫‪f‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻮﺍﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻷﻗﻄﺎﺏ ﺍﳌﻮﺟﺒﺔ )‪ (+‬ﻭﺍﻟﺴﺎﻟﺒﺔ )‪ (-‬ﺍﳌﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ‬
‫ﻋﲆ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﻣﻊ ﻣﺜﻴﻼﲥﺎ ﰲ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪g‬‬
‫• • • • • • • • • ‪• • • • • • • • a‬‬
‫‪ : (POWER) 1‬ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ : Z OPEN/CLOSE‬ﻳﻔﺘﺢ ﻋﻠﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺃﻭ ﻳﻐﻠﻘﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪3:27:39‬‬
‫‪2010-04-26‬‬
‫‪HT905TAW-AL_DARELLK_ARA_9712.indd 9‬‬
‫‪10‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻀﲑ‬
‫‪ : +/- TUNING‬ﻟﺘﻮﻟﻴﻒ ﳏﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺩﻳﻮ ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‬
‫~ ‪ : ENTER‬ﻟﻘﺒﻮﻝ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪a‬‬
‫‪b‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪ : O RETURN‬ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﺍﺀ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﳋﺮﻭﺝ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ : TITLE‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ‪ DVD‬ﺍﳊﺎﱄ ﳛﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﲆ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪،‬‬
‫ﻓﺴﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻋﲆ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ .‬ﺃﻭ ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‪.‬‬
‫‪ : DISC MENU‬ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﱃ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻗﺮﺹ ‪.DVD‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻀﲑ‬
‫• • • • • • • • • ‪• • • • • • • • f‬‬
‫‪c‬‬
‫‪d‬‬
‫‪ : ECHO VOL. -/+‬ﻳﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮ￯ ﺻﺪ￯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪ : MIC VOL. -/+‬ﻳﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮ￯ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﳌﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
‫‪ : MARKER‬ﻳﻤﻴﺰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪ : SLEEP‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻛﻲ ﻳﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋ ﹰﻴﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻭﻗﺖ‬
‫ﳏﺪﺩ‪) .‬ﺍﳋﺎﻓﺖ‪ :‬ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﻘﻞ ﺇﺿﺎﺀﺓ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺑﻤﻘﺪﺍﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﺼﻒ‪(.‬‬
‫‪ : z REC‬ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﺒﺎﴍ ‪.USB‬‬
‫‪e‬‬
‫‪ : Bluetooth‬ﺭﺑﻂ ﻭﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻭﻓﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ ﻭﺟﻬﺎﺯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﰲ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺃﺧﺮ￯ ﻏﲑ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ‪.‬‬
‫‪ : VOCAL FADER‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺘﺎﻉ ﺑﺎﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻣﺜﻞ‬
‫‪ ،karaoke‬ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺧﻔﺾ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻣﻐﻨﻲ ﺍﳌﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﰲ ﺍﳌﺼﺎﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺍﳌﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ‪. .‬‬
‫‪f‬‬
‫‪g‬‬
‫• • • • • • • • • ‪• • • • • • • • e‬‬
‫• • • • • • • • • ‪• • • • • • • • g‬‬
‫ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ ‪ :‬ﺗﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ‪) .‬ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬
‫‪ LG‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﰲ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﰲ ﻣﺴﺘﻮ￯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻭﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻭﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﳋﺎﺹ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ‪ LG‬ﹰ‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﲆ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪) POWER‬ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ( ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ﺯﺭ‬
‫‪) (U/u) PR/CH‬ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ( ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ‪.‬‬
‫‪ : HOME‬ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ]‪.[Home‬‬
‫‪INFO/DISPLAY‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :‬ﻳﺼﻞ ﺇﱃ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﲆ‬
‫‪) U/u/I/i‬ﻳﺴﺎﺭ‪/‬ﻳﻤﲔ‪/‬ﺃﻋﲆ‪/‬ﺃﺳﻔﻞ(‪ :‬ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻟﺘﺼﻔﺢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﻭﺽ ﺍﻟﻈﺎﻫﺮﺓ ﻋﲆ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ : (-/+) PRESET‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺩﻳﻮ‪.‬‬
‫‪3:27:39‬‬
‫‪2010-04-26‬‬
‫‪HT905TAW-AL_DARELLK_ARA_9712.indd 10‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻀﲑ‬
‫‪11‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ‬
‫‪c‬‬
‫‪a‬‬
‫‪b‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻀﲑ‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪d‬‬
‫‪e‬‬
‫‪ihg f‬‬
‫‪) \/1 a‬ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ(‬
‫ﻳﺸﻐﻞ ﺃﻭ ﻳﻮﻗﻒ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ b‬ﺩﺭﺝ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ‬
‫‪ c‬ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﻋﺮﺽ‬
‫ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻮﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ d‬ﻣﺴﺘﻮ￯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
‫ﻳﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮ￯ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻣﻜﱪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪) F e‬ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ(‬
‫ﻳﻐﲑ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪) ./> f‬ﲣﻄﻲ(‬
‫ﻳﺬﻫﺐ ﺇﱃ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ‪/‬ﺍﳌﺴﺎﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﱄ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺒﺤﺚ ﻟﻠﺨﻠﻒ ﺃﻭ ﻟﻸﻣﺎﻡ‪) .‬ﺇﺿﻐﻂ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ(‬
‫ﳌﻮﺍﻟﻔﺔ ﳏﻄﺔ ﺍﻹﺫﺍﻋﺔ ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪3:27:39‬‬
‫‪2010-04-26‬‬
‫‪k j‬‬
‫‪l‬‬
‫‪) x g‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ(‬
‫ﻳﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪) N/X h‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪/‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻣﺆﻗﺖ(‬
‫ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻳﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﺆﻗﺘﹰﺎ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮ￯‬
‫ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﳌﺆﻗﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪) Z i‬ﻓﺘﺢ‪/‬ﺇﻏﻼﻕ(‬
‫ﻳﻔﺘﺢ ﺃﻭ ﻳﻐﻠﻖ ﺩﺭﺝ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ‪.‬‬
‫‪ j‬ﻣﻨﻔﺬ ‪USB‬‬
‫ﻳﻮﺻﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪.USB‬‬
‫‪ k‬ﻣﻨﻔﺬ ﺩﺧﻮﻝ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻠﻪ ﺑﻤﺸﻐﻞ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻟﻠﻨﻘﻞ ﺑﻤﺨﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻣﻘﺎﺑﺲ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ‪1/2‬‬
‫‪HT905TAW-AL_DARELLK_ARA_9712.indd 11‬‬
‫‪12‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻀﲑ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﳋﻠﻔﻴﺔ‬
‫‪de‬‬
‫‪c‬‬
‫‪b‬‬
‫‪a‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻀﲑ‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪f‬‬
‫‪g‬‬
‫‪ih‬‬
‫‪ a‬ﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ b‬ﻣﻮﺻﻼﺕ ﻣﻜﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻠﻪ ﺑﻜﺎﺑﻼﺕ ﻣﻜﱪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪ c‬ﻣﺮﻭﺣﺔ ﺗﺒﺮﻳﺪ‬
‫‪ d‬ﻣﻮﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺋﻲ‬
‫‪ -FM‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻠﻪ ﺑﻬﻮﺍﺋﻲ ‪ FM‬ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻭﺩ ﻳﺴﻠﻚ‪.‬‬
‫‪ – AM‬ﻭﺻﻞ ﻫﻮﺍﺋﻲ ‪ AM‬ﺍﻟﺤﻠﻘﻲ‬
‫‪ e‬ﻣﺨﺮﺝ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻠﻪ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ ﻋﺒﺮ ﻣﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.‬‬
‫‪3:27:40‬‬
‫‪2010-04-26‬‬
‫‪ f‬ﻣﺨﺮﺝ ‪) HDMI‬ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ﺃ(‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻠﻪ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ ﻋﺒﺮ ﻣﺪﺍﺧﻞ ‪.HDMI‬‬
‫)ﻭﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ(‬
‫‪OPTICAL IN h‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻠﻪ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻌﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺼﺮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪COMPONENT VIDEO (Y PB PR)OUT- i‬‬
‫‪(PUT (PROGRESSIVE SCAN‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻠﻪ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ ﺑﻤﺪﺍﺧﻞ ‪. Y PB PR‬‬
‫‪AUX (L/R) INPUT j‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻠﻪ ﺑﻤﺼﺪﺭ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﻣﺨﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
‫ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺗﻴﻦ‪.‬‬
‫‪HT905TAW-AL_DARELLK_ARA_9712.indd 12‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﱰﻛﻴﺐ‬
‫‪13‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﱰﻛﻴﺐ‬
‫ﲡﻤﻴﻊ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻜﱪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
‫ﻣﻊ ﻣﻜﱪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﳏﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﱰﻛﻴﺐ‬
‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻣﻜﱪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺠﻤﻴﻊ ﻣﻜﱪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﺟﺎ ﹰﺀ ﻓﺤﺺ ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍﺀ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﲡﻤﻴﻊ ﻣﻜﱪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﳊﺎﻕ ﻣﻜﱪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺑﺤﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﻣﻜﱪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ‬
‫ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﱪﺍﻏﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻜﱪ ﺻﻮﺕ‬
‫ﺍﳊﺎﻣﻞ‬
‫‪3:27:40‬‬
‫‪2010-04-26‬‬
‫‪HT905TAW-AL_DARELLK_ARA_9712.indd 13‬‬
‫‪14‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﱰﻛﻴﺐ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﲈﻋﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‬
‫‪ .1‬ﻭﺻﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﻼﻙ ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﻓﻴﻖ ﻛﻞ ﴍﻳﻂ ﻣﻠﻮﻥ ﰲ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻷﺳﻼﻙ ﺑﻄﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﳌﻠﻮﻥ ﺑﻨﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﻭﺍﳌﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﲆ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﳋﻠﻔﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺑﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻷﺻﺎﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻼﺳﺘﻴﻜﻴﺔ ﻟﻔﺘﺢ‬
‫ﻃﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ‪ .‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻚ ﻭﺣﺮﺭ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻷﺻﺎﺑﻊ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﱰﻛﻴﺐ‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫ﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻑ ﺍﻷﺳﻤﺮ ﻟﻜﻞ ﺳﻠﻚ ﺑﺎﻷﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ‪-‬‬
‫)ﺳﺎﻟﺐ( ﻭﺍﻟﻄﺮﻑ ﺍﻷﲪﺮ ﺑﺎﻷﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﻷﺧﺮ￯ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ‪+‬‬
‫)ﻣﻮﺟﺐ(‪.‬‬
‫‪ .2‬ﺃﻭﺻﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﻼﻙ ﺑﻤﻜﱪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻭﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻑ ﺍﻵﺧﺮ ﻟﻜﻞ ﺳﻠﻚ ﺑﻤﻜﱪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻭﻓﻖ‬
‫ﺗﺼﻨﻴﻒ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ‪.‬‬
‫‪3:27:40‬‬
‫‪2010-04-26‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﲈﻋﺔ‬
‫ﺍﳌﻜﺎﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺗﻘﺎﱄ‬
‫ﺍﳌﻜﱪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﰐ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻲ‬
‫ﺃﻱ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺃﻣﺎﻣﻲ‬
‫ﺃﺑﻴﺾ‬
‫ﺍﳉﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ‬
‫ﻳﺴﺎﺭ ﺍﳌﻘﺪﻣﺔ‬
‫ﺃﺧﴬ‬
‫ﺃﲪﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺳﻂ‬
‫ﺍﳉﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺳﻂ‬
‫ﻳﻤﲔ ﺍﳌﻘﺪﻣﺔ‬
‫ﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺑﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﺴﲈﻋﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ﻛﻞ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺑﻼﺳﺘﻴﻜﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﺎﻷﺻﺎﺑﻊ ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻓﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﲆ‬
‫ﻗﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﻛﻞ ﺳﲈﻋﺔ‪ .‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻚ ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻼﺳﺘﻴﻜﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﺑﺎﻹﺻﺒﻊ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ‬
‫ﺗﻨﺒﻪ ﻟﻠﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻷﻃﻔﺎﻝ ﺃﻳﺪﳞﻢ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻱ ﺃﺷﻴﺎﺀ ﰲ ﻗﻨﺎﺓ ﻣﻜﱪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ*‪.‬‬
‫*ﻗﻨﺎﺓ ﻣﻜﱪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪ :‬ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺟﻬﻮﺭ ﻭﺍﻓﺮ ﰲ ﺍﳉﺰﺀ ﺍﳋﺎﺹ‬
‫ﺑﺎﳌﺘﺤﺪﺙ )ﺿﻤﻨﻴﺔ(‬
‫‪HT905TAW-AL_DARELLK_ARA_9712.indd 14‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﱰﻛﻴﺐ‬
‫‪15‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻣﻜﱪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﳌﻮﴍ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺘﻘﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻷﲪﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﻳﺴﺘﻘﺒﻞ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﳌﺮﺳﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﰲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻐﻠﻖ )ﻻ ﻋﺮﺽ( ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﰲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﳌﻌﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻷﻭﱄ ﹼ‬
‫‪ .2‬ﺃﻭﺻﻞ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺘﻘﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﺑﺎﳌﻨﻔﺬ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .3‬ﺷﻐﹼ ﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ‬
‫ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﺒﻞ‪ :‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻭﻣﺴﺘﻘﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋ ﹰﻴﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ”‪ “MATE OK‬ﰲ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﱰﻛﻴﺐ‬
‫‪ .1‬ﺃﻭﺻﻞ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﻭﻣﻜﱪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﳋﻠﻔﻲ )ﺍﻷﻳﻤﻦ‪،‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻳﴪ( ﺑﻜﺎﺑﻼﺕ ﻣﻜﱪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﹼ‬
‫ﺍﳌﻌﺮﻑ ﻗﺪ ﺗﻢ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﻩ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻞ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺼﻨﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‪ ،‬ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﹼ‬
‫ﺣﺪﺙ ﺗﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﺒﻞ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‪،‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﺮﻑ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮ￯‪.‬‬
‫ﳚﺐ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﹼ‬
‫‪ .1‬ﺷﻐﹼ ﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ‬
‫‪ .2‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻄﻮ ﹰ‬
‫ﻻ ﻋﲆ ﺯﺭ ‪) STOP x‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ( ﺍﳌﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﰲ ﻣﻘﺪﻣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪) MUTE‬ﻛﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ( ﰲ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ‪ .‬ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ”‪) “REMATE‬ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻻﻗﱰﺍﻥ( ﰲ‬
‫ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .3‬ﺃﻭﻗﻒ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪3:27:40‬‬
‫‪2010-04-26‬‬
‫‪HT905TAW-AL_DARELLK_ARA_9712.indd 15‬‬
‫‪16‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﱰﻛﻴﺐ‬
‫ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻠﺐ ﺍﳊﺪﻳﺪﻱ )ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺸﻮﻳﺶ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﻭﻣﻐﻨﺎﻃﻴﴘ ﻓﻘﻂ(‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻠﺐ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻳﺘﻲ ﻣﻊ ﻛﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﲈﻋﺔ )ﻟﻠﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﲠﺬﻩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻭﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻱ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻠﺐ ﺍﻟﻠﻔﺮﻳﺘﻲ ﺇﱃ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻀﺠﻴﺞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺇﺭﻓﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻘﻠﺐ ﺍﳊﺪﻳﺪﻱ‬
‫‪ .1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ﺳﺪﺍﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﻠﺐ ﺍﳊﺪﻳﺪﻱ ﻟﻔﺘﺤﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .2‬ﻟﻒ ﻛﺎﺑﻼﺕ ﻣﻜﱪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻣﺮﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻋﲆ ﺍﻟﻘﻠﺐ ﺍﳊﺪﻳﺪﻱ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .3‬ﺍﻏﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﻘﻠﺐ ﺍﳊﺪﻳﺪﻱ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺼﺪﺭ ﻣﻨﻪ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻃﻘﻄﻘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ‪ 3‬ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻘﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﱰﻛﻴﺐ‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫ﻣﺆﺧﺮﺓ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ‬
‫‪3:27:40‬‬
‫‪2010-04-26‬‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﻣﻨﺘﺞ ﻳﺼﺪﺭ ﻣﻮﺟﺎﺕ ﻛﻬﺮﻭﻣﻐﻨﺎﻃﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻗﻮﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺮﺏ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﳉﻬﺎﺯ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﳛﺪﺙ ﺗﺸﻮﻳﺶ‪ .‬ﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ )ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ( ﺑﻌﻴﺪﹰ ﺍ ﻋﻦ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺍﳌﻜﺎﻥ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﱂ ﻳﻜﻦ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﳌﺪﺓ ﺗﺰﻳﺪ ﻋﻦ ‪ 10‬ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻖ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﻘﻮﻡ‬
‫ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋ ﹰﻴﺎ ﺇﱃ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﺪﺍﺩ‪ .‬ﰲ ﻧﻤﻂ‬
‫ﺗﻮﻓﲑﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﺘﺤﻮﻝ ﺇﺿﺎﺀﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﲈﻣﲔ ﺍﻟﺜﻨﺎﺋﻴﲔ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﻋﺜﲔ‬
‫ﻟﻠﻀﻮﺀ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﲪﺮ‪ .‬ﻭﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﺘﺤﻮﻝ ﺇﺿﺎﺀﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﲈﻣﲔ ﺍﻟﺜﻨﺎﺋﻴﲔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺎﻋﺜﲔ ﻟﻠﻀﻮﺀ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻋﺎﺩﺕ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﺳﻴﺨﺮﺝ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻜﱪﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ )ﻣﻜﱪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﳋﻠﻔﻴﺔ( ﺧﻼﻝ ﺛﻮﺍﻥ ﻗﻠﻴﻠﺔ‬
‫ﰲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻝ ﻫﻨﺎ ﺃﻗﴫ ﻣﺎ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ‬
‫• ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺑﲔ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻭﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﰲ ﺣﺪﻭﺩ ‪32‬‬
‫ﻗﺪﻡ )‪ 10‬ﺃﻣﺘﺎﺭ(‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﳊﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﲆ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ ﺃﺩﺍﺀ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﳌﺮﺳﻞ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ‬
‫ﻭﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﻋﲆ ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻌﻀﻬﲈ ﺗﱰﺍﻭﺡ ﻣﺎ ﺑﲔ ‪ 6‬ﺃﻗﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫)‪ 3‬ﻣﱰ( ﻭ‪ 32‬ﻗﺪﻡ )‪ 10‬ﺃﻣﺘﺎﺭ(‪ ،‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﻤﻜﻦ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﻓﺸﻞ ﰲ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺯﺍﺩﺕ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺫﻟﻚ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﺣﺮﺹ ﻋﲆ ﺗﻮﻓﻴﻖ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻣﻜﱪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻣﻊ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﻼﺋﻢ‬
‫ﺍﳌﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﲆ ﺍﳌﻜﻮﻧﺎﺕ‪ (+) .‬ﻣﻊ )‪ (+‬ﻭ)‪ (-‬ﻣﻊ )‪ .(-‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﻋﻜﺲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺑﻼﺕ‪ ،‬ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻣﺸﻮﻫﹰ ﺎ ﻭﻳﻔﺘﻘﺪ ﺟﻬﺎﺭﺗﻪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﺴﺘﻐﺮﻕ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﺛﻮﺍﻥ ﻗﻠﻴﻠﺔ )ﻭﻗﺪ ﻳﺴﺘﻐﺮﻕ ﻓﱰﺓ ﺃﻃﻮﻝ( ﳊﺪﻭﺙ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺑﲔ ﺍﳌﺮﺳﻞ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﻭﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻜﱪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﳋﻠﻔﻲ ﻋﲆ ﺑﻌﺪ ‪ 11‬ﺑﻮﺻﺔ )‪ 30‬ﺳﻢ( ﻋﲆ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻗﻞ ﻋﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ ﺃﻭ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺐ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﴢ‪.‬‬
‫)‪fig. 3‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪HT905TAW-AL_DARELLK_ARA_9712.indd 16‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﱰﻛﻴﺐ‬
‫ﺗﻌﻴﲔ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‬
‫‪ A‬ﺍﻟﺴﲈﻋﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﴪ￯ )‪/(L‬‬
‫‪ B‬ﺍﻟﺴﲈﻋﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻨﻰ )‪:(R‬‬
‫ﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﲈﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ ﻋﲆ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﻲ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﻮﺏ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺑﺎﻟﺘﻮﺍﺯﻱ ﻗﺪﺭ ﺍﻹﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻣﻊ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺿﻴﺤﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﱄ ﻳﻮﺿﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻣﺜﺎ ﹰ‬
‫ﻻ ﻋﲆ ﺗﻌﻴﲔ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﰲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﲈﺕ ﲣﺘﻠﻒ ﻋﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﻠﻴﺔ ﻷﳖﺎ ﻷﻏﺮﺍﺽ ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺤﻴﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﻮ￯ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻴﻄﻲ‪ ،‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﻭﺿﻊ‬
‫ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻲ‪ ،‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺎﻉ )‪.(A‬‬
‫‪ C‬ﺍﻟﺴﲈﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﻄﻰ‪:‬‬
‫ﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﲈﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﻄﻰ ﺃﻋﲆ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺳﻔﻞ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﻮﺏ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫‪ D‬ﺍﻟﺴﲈﻋﺔ ﺍﳌﺤﻴﻄﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﴪ￯ )‪/(L‬‬
‫‪ E‬ﺍﻟﺴﲈﻋﺔ ﺍﳌﺤﻴﻄﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻨﻰ )‪:(R‬‬
‫ﺿﻊ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺴﲈﻋﺎﺕ ﺧﻠﻒ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﺳﺘﲈﻋﻚ‪ ،‬ﻣﻮﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﻟﻠﺪﺍﺧﻞ‬
‫ﻗﻠﻴ ﹰ‬
‫ﻼ‬
‫‪B‬‬
‫‪C‬‬
‫‪A‬‬
‫‪G‬‬
‫‪A‬‬
‫‪E‬‬
‫‪F‬‬
‫‪A‬‬
‫‪ G‬ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‬
‫‪A‬‬
‫‪A‬‬
‫‪3:27:40‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻌﺘﱪ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﻜﱪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﰐ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻲ ﺑﺬﻱ ﺃﳘﻴﺔ ﻛﱪ￯‪ ،‬ﺣﻴﺚ‬
‫ﺃﻥ ﺃﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﳋﻔﻴﺾ ﺍﳌﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﺇﲡﺎﻫﻴﺔ ﺇﱃ ﺣﺪ ﺑﻌﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻜﻦ ﹸﻳﻔﻀﻞ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﻜﱪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﰐ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺮﺏ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺴﲈﻋﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﺃﺩﻳﺮﳞﺎ ﻗﻠﻴ ﹰ‬
‫ﻼ ﻧﺤﻮ ﻭﺳﻂ ﺍﻟﻐﺮﻓﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻧﻌﻜﺎﺳﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﳉﺪﺍﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﱰﻛﻴﺐ‬
‫‪ F‬ﺍﳌﻜﱪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﰐ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻲ‪:‬‬
‫‪A‬‬
‫‪17‬‬
‫‪2010-04-26‬‬
‫‪D‬‬
‫‪HT905TAW-AL_DARELLK_ARA_9712.indd 17‬‬
‫‪18‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﱰﻛﻴﺐ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺇﺣﺪ￯ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻋﲆ ﻗﺪﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﳉﻬﺎﺯ‬
‫ﺍﳌﻮﺟﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ‬
‫• ﺍﻋﺘﲈﺩﺍ ﻋﲆ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ ﻭﺍﳉﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻵﺧﺮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﰲ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻠﻪ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻥ‬
‫ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﻋﺪﺓ ﻃﺮﻕ ﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﺸﻐﻞ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺇﺣﺪ￯ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻼﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﰲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﱰﻛﻴﺐ‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫• ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﱃ ﺃﺩﻟﺔ ﺍﳍﺎﺗﻒ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺴﱰﻳﻮ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺧﺮ￯ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﳊﺎﺟﺔ ﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻼﺕ ﻋﲆ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ ﻭﺟﻪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﺸﻐﻞ ﻣﺒﺎﴍﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﻟﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ ﺇﱃ‬
‫ﻗﻨﺎﺓ ﻣﺪﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻣﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻣﻘﺎﺑﺲ‬
‫‪) COMPONENT VIDEO OUTPUT‬ﳐﺮﺝ ﻣﻜﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ()‪) (PROGRESSIVE SCAN‬ﺑﺤﺚ ﻣﺘﺪﺭﺝ(‬
‫ﻋﲆ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺑﻤﻘﺎﺑﺲ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﳌﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﳍﺎ ﻋﲆ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﻛﺎﺑﻼﺕ ﺍﳌﻜﻮﻧﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺑﺈﻣﻜﺎﻧﻚ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺴﻤﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺳﲈﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﳌﻜﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﻮﺻﻞ ﺍﳌﺸﻐﻞ ﻋﱪ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻣﺸﻮﻫﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ‬
‫ﺃﺧﴬ‬
‫ﺃﺭﺯﻕ‬
‫ﺃﲪﺮ‬
‫‪3:27:41‬‬
‫‪2010-04-26‬‬
‫‪HT905TAW-AL_DARELLK_ARA_9712.indd 18‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﱰﻛﻴﺐ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﳐﺮﺝ ‪HDMI‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ ﺗﻠﻔﺎﺯ ‪ HDMI‬ﺃﻭ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻋﺮﺽ‪ ،‬ﺑﺈﻣﻜﺎﻧﻚ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻠﻪ‬
‫ﲠﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ .HDMI‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻣﻘﺒﺲ ﳐﺮﺝ‬
‫‪ HDMI‬ﻋﲆ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺑﻤﻘﺒﺲ ﻣﺪﺧﻞ ‪ HDMI‬ﻋﲆ ﺗﻠﻔﺎﺯ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ HDMI‬ﺍﳌﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ ﻋﲆ ‪) HDMI‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻚ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ‪HDMI‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‬
‫‪19‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ‪ HDMI‬ﻻ ﻳﻘﺒﻞ ﳐﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ‬
‫ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ‪ HDMI‬ﻣﺸﻮﻫﹰ ﺎ ﻭﻗﺪ ﻻ ﳜﺮﺝ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ‪ HDMI‬ﺃﻭ‪ DVI‬ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﳑﺎ ﻳﲇ‪:‬‬
‫ ﺣﺎﻭﻝ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ‪ HDMI/DVI‬ﻭﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‪ .‬ﺛﻢ‬‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ‪ HDMI/DVI‬ﻭﺍﺗﺮﻛﻪ ﺣﻮﺍﱄ ‪ 30‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ‬
‫ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺪﺧﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﳉﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﳌﺘﺼﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﻜﻞ‬‫ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﻮﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻟﻴﺲ ﲨﻊ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ‪ HDMI‬ﺃﻭ‪ DVI‬ﺍﳌﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ‪ HDCP‬ﺗﻌﻤﻞ‬
‫ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﱰﻛﻴﺐ‬
‫ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﳉﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﳌﺘﺼﻞ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﻣﺪﺧﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪480i x 720‬‬‫)ﺃﻭ ‪) 480p x 720 ،(576i‬ﺃﻭ ‪، 720p x 1 280 ،(576p‬‬
‫‪ 1 080i x 1 920‬ﺃﻭ ‪. 1 080p x 1 920‬‬
‫ ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻻ‬‫ﻳﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ‪. HDCP‬‬
‫ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻻ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻭﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ ﺗﻐﲑﺕ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺳﻮﺩ ﺃﻭ‬‫ﺍﻷﺧﴬ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺪ ﲢﺪﺙ ﺿﻮﺿﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺜﻠﺞ ﻋﲆ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪..‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ‬
‫• ‪I‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺗﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﺃﻭ ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﻋﲆ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ HDMI‬ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﺃﻋﲆ ﻣﻦ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ‬
‫‪ HDMI‬ﺍﻹﺻﺪﺍﺭ ‪.1.2A‬‬
‫ﲢﺬﻳﺮ‬
‫‪TIP‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﺎ ﻣﻊ‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺘﺎﻉ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ﻭﺇﺷﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﹰ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ‪ HDMI‬ﻫﺬﺍ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ‪ ،HDMI‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﲑ ﺩﻗﺔ ﳐﺮﺟﺎﺕ‬
‫‪) . HDMI‬ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﱃ "ﺿﺒﻂ ﺩﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ" ﰲ ﺹ ‪(21‬‬
‫‪3:27:41‬‬
‫‪2010-04-26‬‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﻳﻨﺘﺞ ﻋﻦ ﺗﻐﻴﲑ ﺩﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺇﲤﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻗﺼﻮﺭ ﰲ ﺑﻌﺾ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ‪ .‬ﻭﻟﻠﺘﻐﻠﺐ ﻋﲆ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳌﺸﻜﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﳎﺪﺩﹰﺍ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ‪ HDMI‬ﺑـ‪ ، HDCP‬ﺗﺘﻐﲑ‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺳﻮﺩ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺧﴬ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺪ ﲢﺪﺙ ﺿﻮﺿﺎﺀ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺜﻠﺞ ﻋﲆ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ .‬ﰲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻓﺤﺺ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ‪ ، HDMI‬ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺍﻓﺼﻞ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪.HDMI‬‬
‫‪HT905TAW-AL_DARELLK_ARA_9712.indd 19‬‬
‫‪20‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﱰﻛﻴﺐ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ﳐﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ )‪ (VIDEO OUT‬ﺍﳌﻮﺟﻮﺩ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﰲ ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺑﺈﻣﻜﺎﻧﻚ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺴﻤﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺳﲈﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﱰﻛﻴﺐ‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ‬
‫ﺃﺻﻔﺮ‬
‫‪3:27:41‬‬
‫‪2010-04-26‬‬
‫‪HT905TAW-AL_DARELLK_ARA_9712.indd 20‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﱰﻛﻴﺐ‬
‫ﺗﻌﻴﲔ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ‬
‫ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻗﻴﻢ ﺩﻗﺔ ﺍﳌﺨﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﳌﺨﺮﺝ‬
‫‪ HDMI‬ﻭﻣﻘﺎﺑﺲ ﳐﺮﺝ ﻣﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.‬‬
‫‪21‬‬
‫ﺩﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺈﺷﺎﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﲑ ﺩﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ]‪ [Setup‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪. HOME‬‬
‫‪ .2‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ I/i‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪) [Setup‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ(‪ 0‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫‪ .~ ENTER‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ]‪) [Setup‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻥ ﺩﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﳌﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﰲ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻗﺪ ﲣﺘﻠﻒ ﻋﻦ ﺩﻗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﳋﺎﺭﺟﺔ ﺑﻨﺎﺀ ﻋﲆ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫]‪) [HDMI OUT‬ﳐﺮﺝ ‪1 080i ،1 080p :(HDMI‬‬
‫‪ 720p ،‬ﻭ‪) 480p‬ﺃﻭ ‪ (576p‬ﻭ‪) 480i‬ﺃﻭ ‪(576i‬‬
‫]‪) [COMPONENT VIDEO OUT‬ﳐﺮﺝ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫ﺍﳌﻜﻮﻥ(‪) 480p :‬ﺃﻭ ‪ (576p‬ﻭ‪) 480i‬ﺃﻭ ‪(576i‬‬
‫ﹼ‬
‫]‪) [VIDEO OUT‬ﳐﺮﺝ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ(‪) 480i :‬ﺃﻭ ‪(576i‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﱰﻛﻴﺐ‬
‫‪ .3‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ U/u‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ]‪) [Display‬ﻋﺮﺽ( ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ i‬ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﱃ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻮ￯ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﲏ‪.‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪ .4‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ U/u‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ]‪) [Resolution‬ﺩﻗﺔ( ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ i‬ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﱃ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻮ￯ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻟﺚ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .5‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ U/u‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫‪) ~ ENTER‬ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ( ﻟﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻙ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺍﳋﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ ﻻ ﻳﻘﺒﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﻮ￯ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺒﺎﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻗﻤﺖ‬
‫ﺑﻀﺒﻄﻪ ﰲ ﺍﳌﺸﻐﻞ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮ￯ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺒﺎﻧﺔ ﻋﲆ ‪ 480‬ﺑﻜﺴﻞ )ﺃﻭ‬
‫‪ 576‬ﺑﻜﺴﻞ( ﻛﲈ ﻳﲇ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ‪ x STOP‬ﻷﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ‪ 5‬ﺛﻮﺍﲏ‪.‬‬
‫‪3:27:41‬‬
‫‪2010-04-26‬‬
‫‪HT905TAW-AL_DARELLK_ARA_9712.indd 21‬‬
‫‪22‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﱰﻛﻴﺐ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﳏﻤﻮﻝ ‪AUDIO IN‬‬
‫)‪(PORT. IN‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﳐﺮﺝ ﺍﳉﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﳌﺤﻤﻮﻝ )‪ MP3‬ﺃﻭ‪ PMP‬ﺍﻟﺦ(‬
‫ﺑﻤﻮﺻﻞ ﺩﺧﻞ )‪.AUDIO (PORT. IN‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ‪AUX IN‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺍﳉﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﰲ ﺑﻤﻮﺻﻞ )‪ (L/R‬ﻣﺪﺧﻞ ‪AUX‬‬
‫‪.AUDIO‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﳏﻤﻮﻝ ‪PORT. IN‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ‪AUX IN‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﱰﻛﻴﺐ‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪ MP3‬ﺃﻭ‪ PMP‬ﺍﻟﺦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺳﺘﲈﻉ ﺇﱃ ﺍﳌﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺸﻐﻞ ﺍﳌﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ‬
‫ﺍﳌﺤﻤﻮﻝ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ‬
‫ﺇﱃ ﻣﻘﺎﺑﺲ ﳐﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
‫ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﳌﻜﻮﻥ‬
‫)‪ ،TV، VCR‬ﺇﻟﺦ‪(...‬‬
‫ﺃﲪﺮ‬
‫ﺃﺑﻴﺾ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﻣﺸﻐﻼﺕ ﺍﳌﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﺍﳌﺤﻤﻮﻟﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .1‬ﻭﺻﻞ ﺍﳌﺸﻐﻞ ﺍﳌﺤﻤﻮﻝ "ﺑﺎﳌﺪﺧﻞ" ﻣﻮﺻﻞ )ﻣﺪﺧﻞ ﺍﳌﺤﻤﻮﻝ (‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‬
‫ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﳉﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﳋﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﺑﻤﻮﺻﻞ ﺃﻭﻛﺲ ”‪“AUX‬‬
‫ﺍﳌﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .2‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ‪.(POWER) 1‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ‬
‫ﺇﻥ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ ﺑﻪ ﳐﺮﺝ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺕ )ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ(‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻠﻪ ﺑﻘﺎﺑﺲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ )ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ( ﺍﻷﻳﴪ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪3:27:42‬‬
‫‪2010-04-26‬‬
‫‪ .3‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺧﺎﺻﻴﺔ ‪ PORTABLE‬ﺃﻭ ‪ AUX‬ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ‪t‬‬
‫‪.RADIO&INPUT‬‬
‫‪ .4‬ﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﺍﳉﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﳋﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺸﻐﻞ ﺍﳌﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﺍﳌﺤﻤﻮﻝ ﻭﺍﺑﺪﺃ ﰲ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪HT905TAW-AL_DARELLK_ARA_9712.indd 22‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﱰﻛﻴﺐ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ‪USB‬‬
‫ﻭﺻﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺬ ‪ USB‬ﺍﳋﺎﺹ ﺑﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ‪) USB‬ﺃﻭ ﻣﺸﻐﻞ ‪ ،MP3‬ﺍﻟﺦ(‬
‫ﺑﻤﻨﻔﺬ ‪ USB‬ﺍﳌﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﰲ ﻣﻘﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ‪USB‬‬
‫‪23‬‬
‫ﺟﻬﺰﺓ ‪ USB‬ﺍﳌﻼﺋﻤﺔ‬
‫• ﻣﺸﻐﻞ ﺍﳌﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ)‪ (MP3‬ﻣﺸﻐﻞ ﺍﳌﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ)‪ (MP3‬ﻓﻼﺵ‬
‫• ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ )‪ (USB‬ﻓﻼﺵ ‪ :‬ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺪﻋﻢ )‪ 2.0 (USB‬ﻭ‬
‫)‪1.1 (USB‬‬
‫• ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ‪ USB‬ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﲠﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻻ ﺗﺪﻋﻢ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ‬
‫‪.USB‬‬
‫ﻣﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎﺕ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ "‪"USB‬‬
‫• ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺘﻄﻠﺐ ﲢﻤﻴﻞ ﺑﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻠﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ‪ ،‬ﻏﲑ ﻣﺪﻋﻮﻣﺔ‪.supported.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﺴﺤﺐ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ "‪ "USB‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﺰﻉ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪ USB‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‬
‫‪.1‬ﺍﺧﱰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺧﺎﺻﻴﺔ ﳐﺘﻠﻒ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫)‪ (STOP) (x‬ﻣﺮﺗﲔ ﻣﺘﺘﺎﻟﻴﺘﲔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .2‬ﺍﻧﺰﻉ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪ USB‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫• ﳌﻨﻊ ﻓﻘﺪﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺪﻋﻢ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﱰﻛﻴﺐ‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﺗﺴﺘﻐﺮﻕ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ "‪ "USB‬ﺍﻟﻜﺒﲑﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﺭﺓ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻀﻌﺔ‬
‫ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻖ ﰲ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ‪.‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﲆ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ "‪ "USB‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﲤﺪﻳﺪ‬
‫ﻟـ "‪ "USB‬ﺃﻭ ﳏﻮﺭ "‪."USB‬‬
‫• ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﳌﻠﻔﺎﺕ ‪ NTFS‬ﻏﲑ ﻣﺪﻋﻮﻡ‪.‬‬
‫)ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﳌﻠﻔﺎﺕ )‪ FAT(16/32‬ﻫﻮ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﻴﺪ ﺍﳌﺪﻋﻮﻡ‪(.‬‬
‫• ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻏﲑ ﻣﺪﻋﻮﻣﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻭﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﲨﺎﱄ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﳌﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺇﱃ‬
‫)‪ (1 000‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ‬
‫• ﳏﺮﻙ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺍﻟﺼﻠﺐ ﺍﳋﺎﺭﺟﻲ ‪ ،‬ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﻣﻘﻔﻠﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ‬
‫"‪ "USB‬ﺻﻠﺐ ﻏﲑ ﻣﺪﻋﻮﻣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺬ ‪ USB‬ﺍﳌﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺨﴢ‪ .‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻛﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﲣﺰﻳﻦ‪.‬‬
‫‪3:27:42‬‬
‫‪2010-04-26‬‬
‫‪HT905TAW-AL_DARELLK_ARA_9712.indd 23‬‬
‫‪24‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﱰﻛﻴﺐ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ‪OPTICAL IN‬‬
‫ﺃﻭﺻﻞ ﺍﳌﺨﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﻮﺣﺪﺓ )ﺃﻭ ﺍﳉﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ﻭﻧﺤﻮ ﺫﻟﻚ(‬
‫ﺑﻤﻮﺻﻞ ‪.. OPTICAL IN‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ‪OPTICAL IN‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﳍﻮﺍﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻫﻮﺍﺋﻲ ‪ FM/AM‬ﺍﳌﺰﻭﺩ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﲈﻉ ﻟﻠﺮﺍﺩﻳﻮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺩﺍﺋﺮﺓ ﻫﻮﺍﺋﻲ ‪ AM‬ﺑﻤﻮﺻﻞ ﻫﻮﺍﺋﻲ ‪.AM‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺳﻠﻚ ﻫﻮﺍﺋﻲ ‪ FM‬ﺑﻤﻮﺻﻞ ﻫﻮﺍﺋﻲ ‪.FM‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﳍﻮﺍﺋﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﱰﻛﻴﺐ‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫ﳌﻘﺎﺑﺴﻞ ﺇﺧﺮﺝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﰲ ﻣﻜﻮﻧﻚ‪.‬‬
‫)ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ‪ ،‬ﺟﻬﺎﺯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯﻱ‪،‬‬
‫ﻭﻧﺤﻮ ﺫﻟﻚ(‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﺤﺎﻛﺎﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺮﺡ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻟﻴﺔ ‪ez‬‬
‫ﺃﻧﺼﺖ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ ﻭﺍﻟﺪﻱ ﰲ ﺩﻱ ﻭﺍﳉﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ﺫﻱ‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ‪ 2.1) 5.1‬ﺃﻭ ‪ (2‬ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ‪ .‬ﻭﺣﺘﻰ ﰲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺇﻏﻼﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪ ،‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺿﻐﻄﺖ ﻋﲆ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪) OPTICAL‬ﺑﴫﻱ(‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻮﻑ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻓﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻭﺗﺘﻐﲑ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋ ﹰﻴﺎ ﺇﱃ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪) AUX OPT‬ﺧﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺍﳉﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﰲ(‪.‬‬
‫‪ .1‬ﺻﻞ ﻣﻘﺒﺲ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﴫﻱ )‪ (OPTICAL IN‬ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‬
‫ﺑﻤﻘﺒﺲ ﺍﻹﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺒﴫﻱ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ )ﺃﻭ ﺍﳉﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﻏﲑ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ( ﻟﺪﻳﻚ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .2‬ﺍﺧﱰ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪) AUX OPT‬ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﳉﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﰲ( ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪) OPTICAL‬ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﴫﻳﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫‪ .3‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪) AUX OPT‬ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﳉﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﰲ( ﺑﺸﻜﻞ‬
‫ﻣﺒﺎﴍ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .4‬ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪) AUX OPT‬ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﳉﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﰲ( ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪) OPTICAL‬ﺑﴫﻱ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺼﺒﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮ￯‪.‬‬
‫‪3:27:42‬‬
‫‪2010-04-26‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ‬
‫• ﻟﺘﺠﻨﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻳﺶ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﻫﻮﺍﺋﻲ ‪ AM‬ﺍﳊﻠﻘﻲ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‬
‫ﻭﺍﳌﻜﻮﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺮ￯‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺪ ﺳﻠﻚ ﻫﻮﺍﺋﻲ ‪ FM‬ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪ .‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺳﻠﻚ ﻫﻮﺍﺋﻲ‬
‫‪ ،FM‬ﺍﺣﺮﺹ ﻗﺪﺭ ﺍﻹﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻈﻞ ﰲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺃﻓﻘﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪HT905TAW-AL_DARELLK_ARA_9712.indd 24‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﱰﻛﻴﺐ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﻭﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻼﺕ ﻣﺘﻔﺮﻗﺔ ﻋﲆ‬
‫ﻣﻮﺍﺩ ﻛﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﲈ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻟﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﻭﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ ﻭﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﺎ ﺇﱃ‬
‫ﺫﻟﻚ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﲆ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﻛﻞ ﺑﻨﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻨﻮﺩ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ‪ 25‬ﺣﺘﻰ ‪.29‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪5‬ﻏﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﲆ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻷﻭﻝ ﻣﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺈﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﻋﲆ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﻠﻔﺎﺯﻙ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪ (POWER) 1‬ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‪ .‬ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﻋﲆ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻹﻇﻬﺎﺭ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ )‪(Setup Menu‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﳋﺮﻭﺝ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ‬
‫‪ .1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪. HOME‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬
‫‪ .2‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ]‪ [Setup‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪.I i‬‬
‫‪ .3‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.~ ENTER‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ]‪[Setup‬‬
‫‪ .4‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪HOME‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ]‪.[Setup‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﻟﻺﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬
‫‪vV‬‬
‫‪Move‬‬
‫‪b‬‬
‫‪Move‬‬
‫‪ .2‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ U u I i‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻟﻐﺔ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ﺩﺧﻮﻝ‬
‫)‪.(~ ENTER‬‬
‫ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻭ ‪ O RETURN‬ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ‬
‫‪u‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﱰﻛﻴﺐ‬
‫ﹼ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻭﱄ ﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‪ .‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ‬
‫ﳚﺐ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻜﻤﻞ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺃﻭﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﻠﻐﺔ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﺍﻹﻧﺠﻠﻴﺰﻳﺔ‬
‫ﹼ‬
‫‪25‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﱃ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺃﺧﺮ￯‪.‬‬
‫‪I‬‬
‫ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﱃ ﻣﺴﺘﻮ￯ ﺳﺎﺑﻖ‪.‬‬
‫‪B‬‬
‫‪Move‬‬
‫‪i‬‬
‫ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺘﻮ￯ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﱄ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪Close‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪RETURN‬‬
‫~‬
‫‪Select‬‬
‫‪ ~ ENTER‬ﻟﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫]‪ [Setup‬ﺃﻭ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺴﲈﻋﺔ‬
‫‪5.1‬‬
‫]‪.[5.1 Speaker Setup‬‬
‫‪ .3‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ I i‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺩﺧﻮﻝ ]‪ [Enter‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ‬
‫ﺩﺧﻮﻝ )‪ (~ ENTER‬ﻹﳖﺎﺀ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪3:27:43‬‬
‫‪2010-04-26‬‬
‫‪HT905TAW-AL_DARELLK_ARA_9712.indd 25‬‬
‫‪26‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﱰﻛﻴﺐ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ‬
‫‪Menu Language‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﻟﻐﺔ ﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪) Setup‬ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ( ﻭﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﲆ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪Disc Audio / Disc Subtitle / Disc Menu‬‬
‫ﺇﺧﱰ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻔﻀﻠﻬﺎ ﳌﺴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ )ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻷﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ(‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﻭﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ ﻭﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ‪.‬‬
‫]‪[Original‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﲑ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﲠﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﱰﻛﻴﺐ‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫]‪[Other‬‬
‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻟﻐﺔ ﺃﺧﺮ￯‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﺛﻢ‬
‫)‪ (~ ENTER‬ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﺍﳌﻨﺎﻇﺮ ﺍﳌﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻦ ‪ 4‬ﺭﻣﻮﺯ ﻭﻓ ﹰﻘﺎ‬
‫ﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﰲ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ .44‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ )‪ (CLEAR‬ﰲ ﺣﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺭﻣﺰ ﻟﻐﺔ ﺧﺎﻃﺊ‪.‬‬
‫]‪) Off‬ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺗﺮﲨﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ([‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﱰﲨﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ ﺇﱃ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻋﻪ )‪(TV Aspect‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﻣﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻭﻓ ﹰﻘﺎ ﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ ﺍﳋﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ‪.‬‬
‫]‪[4:3‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩﻩ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮ ﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﻋﺮﺿﻪ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻫﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪.4:3‬‬
‫]‪[16:9‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩﻩ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﻋﺮﺿﻪ ‪.16:9‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ )‪(Display Mode‬‬
‫ﺫﺍ ﺣﺪﺩﺕ ‪ ،4:3‬ﻓﺈﻧﻚ ﺳﺘﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﱃ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﺃﻥ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﲠﺎ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺑﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﰲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ ﺍﳋﺎﺹ‬
‫ﺑﻚ‪.‬‬
‫]‪[Letterbox‬‬
‫ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﺮﻳﻀﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺃﴍﻃﺔ ﰲ ﺍﳉﺰﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻱ ﻭﺍﻟﺴﻔﲇ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫]‪[Panscan‬‬
‫ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﺮﻳﻀﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋ ﹰﻴﺎ ﻋﲆ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻭﻳﻘﻮﻡ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻗﺘﺼﺎﺹ ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍﺀ ﻏﲑ ﺍﳌﻨﺎﺳﺒﺔ‪) .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‪/‬ﺍﳌﻠﻒ‬
‫ﻏﲑ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﻣﻊ ‪ ،Pan Scan‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﻨﺴﺒﺔ‬
‫‪(.Letterbox‬‬
‫ﺩﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﺗﻌﻴﲔ ﺩﻗﺔ ﳐﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﻣﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻭ‪ .HDMI‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ‬
‫"ﺗﻌﻴﲔ ﺩﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ" ﳌﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺣﻮ ﺩﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ )ﺹ‬
‫‪.(21‬‬
‫]‪[Auto‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻣﻘﺒﺲ ﳐﺮﺝ ‪ HDMI‬ﺑﺄﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻮﻓﺮ‬
‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ )‪ ،(EDID‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋ ﹰﻴﺎ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺩﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ ﺍﳌﺘﺼﻞ ﻋﲆ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ ﻭﺟﻪ ﳑﻜﻦ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ‬
‫ﺍﳌﻜﻮﻥ(‬
‫‪) COMPONENT VIDEO OUT‬ﳐﺮﺝ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﹼ‬
‫ﻳﻐﲑ ﻣﻦ ﺩﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺇﱃ ‪) 480i‬ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﻫﻮ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﻴﺪ ﺍﳌﺘﺼﻞ‪ ،‬ﻓﻬﺬﺍ ﱢ‬
‫‪ (576i‬ﻛﺪﻗﺔ ﺍﻓﱰﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫]‪[1080p‬‬
‫ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﳋﺎﺭﺝ ‪ 1 080‬ﹰ‬
‫ﺧﻄﺎ ﺗﺪﺭﳚ ﹰﻴﺎ ﰲ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.‬‬
‫]‪[1080i‬‬
‫ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﳋﺎﺭﺝ ‪ 1 080‬ﹰ‬
‫ﺧﻄﺎ ﻣﺘﺪﺍﺧ ﹰ‬
‫ﻼ ﰲ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.‬‬
‫]‪[720p‬‬
‫ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﳋﺎﺭﺝ ‪ 720‬ﹰ‬
‫ﺧﻄﺎ ﺗﺪﺭﳚ ﹰﻴﺎ ﰲ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.‬‬
‫]‪) 480p‬ﺃﻭ ‪[(576p‬‬
‫ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﳋﺎﺭﺝ ‪) 480‬ﺃﻭ ‪ (576‬ﹰ‬
‫ﺧﻄﺎ ﺗﺪﺭﳚ ﹰﻴﺎ ﰲ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.‬‬
‫]‪) 480i‬ﺃﻭ ‪[(576i‬‬
‫ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﳋﺎﺭﺝ ‪) 480‬ﺃﻭ ‪ (576‬ﹰ‬
‫ﺧﻄﺎ ﻣﺘﺪﺍﺧ ﹰ‬
‫ﻼ ﰲ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.‬‬
‫‪3:27:43‬‬
‫‪2010-04-26‬‬
‫‪HT905TAW-AL_DARELLK_ARA_9712.indd 26‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﱰﻛﻴﺐ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
‫‪ 5.1‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﺘﺤﺪﺙ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻋﲆ ﳏﻠﻞ ﺭﻣﻮﺯ ﻗﻨﺎﺓ ‪ 5.1‬ﺍﳌﺪﻣﺞ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .1‬ﺍﺧﱰ ]‪ [5.1 Speaker Setup‬ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ]‪[Audio‬‬
‫‪ .2‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.~ ENTER‬‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ]‪.[5.1 SPEAKER‬‬
‫]ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺴﲈﻋﺔ[‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺴﲈﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﰲ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻠﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ‬
‫ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﻟﻠﺴﲈﻋﺔ ﳏﻈﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻻﺗﻔﺎﻗﻴﺔ ﺗﺮﺧﻴﺺ ﺩﻭﻟﺒﻲ‬
‫ﺩﳚﻴﺘﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫]‪[Size‬‬
‫ﻧﻈﺮﺍ ﻷﻥ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﲈﻋﺔ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻼ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﲑ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪. .‬‬
‫‪ .4‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﳋﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﺯﺭﺍ ‪U u I i‬‬
‫‪ .5‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ﺯﺭ‬
‫‪.O RETURN‬‬
‫]‪[Distance‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﲈﻋﺎﺕ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ‪،DVD Receiver‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺑﲔ ﺍﻟﺴﲈﻋﺎﺕ ﻭﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﲈﻋﻚ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﲈﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﻄﻰ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ ﺃﻛﱪ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﲈﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﳋﻠﻔﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﺩﺭ ﻣﻦ ﻛﻞ ﺳﲈﻋﺔ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺼﻞ ﻟﻠﺴﺎﻣﻊ ﰲ‬
‫ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ‪ I i‬ﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﲈﻋﺔ ﺍﳌﺤﺪﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﺴﺎﻭﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻔﺮﻕ ﺑﲔ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺑﲔ ﺍﻟﺴﲈﻋﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺳﻄﻰ ﻭﺍﳋﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻧﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻧﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﺃﺧﺮ￯‪.‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﱰﻛﻴﺐ‬
‫]‪[Volume‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ I i‬ﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﻮ￯ ﺍﳋﺎﺭﺝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺴﲈﻋﺔ ﺍﳌﺤﺪﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺴﺎﺭ‪/‬ﻳﻤﲔ ﺍﳌﻘﺪﻣﺔ‪-5 ~ 0 :‬‬
‫ﺍﳌﻜﱪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﰐ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻲ‪ ،‬ﻳﺴﺎﺭ‪/‬ﻳﻤﲔ ﺍﳌﻘﺪﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻮﺳﻂ‪-5 ~ 5 :‬‬
‫‪ .3‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ I i‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺴﲈﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪27‬‬
‫]‪[Test‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﱰ ]‪ [Speaker Test Start‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ‪ ،U u‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺯﺭ ‪ .~ ENTER‬ﻭﻟﻠﺘﻮﻗﻒ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺯﺭ‬
‫‪ ~ ENTER‬ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮ￯‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
‫ﳌﻮﺍﺀﻣﺔ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﳋﺎﺹ ﺑﺈﺷﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﺍﳌﺤﻔﻮﻇﺔ‬
‫ﰲ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ )‪(DRC‬‬
‫ﻗﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﻮﺿﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺧﻔﺾ ﻣﺴﺘﻮ￯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ )‪Dolby‬‬
‫‪ Digital‬ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ(‪ .‬ﺍﺿﺒﻄﻪ ﻋﲆ ]‪) [On‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ( ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﲆ‬
‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﲑ‪.‬‬
‫‪3:27:44‬‬
‫‪2010-04-26‬‬
‫‪HT905TAW-AL_DARELLK_ARA_9712.indd 27‬‬
‫‪28‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﱰﻛﻴﺐ‬
‫‪Vocal‬‬
‫]‪) [On‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ( ﻟﺪﻣﺞ ﻗﻨﻮﺍﺕ ‪ karaoke‬ﰲ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻻﺳﱰﻳﻮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ ﺍﳌﻨﺎﻃﻖ‪:‬‬
‫‪HD AV Sync‬‬
‫‪ .1‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ]‪ [Lock‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ‪.i‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻔﻌﻴﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺇﻻ ﻣﻊ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ‪karaoke DVD‬‬
‫ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﱰﻛﻴﺐ‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫ﳛﺪﺙ‪ ،‬ﰲ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻷﺣﻴﺎﻥ‪ ،‬ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﻓﺎﺭﻕ ﺯﻣﻨﻲ ﺑﲔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﰲ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ )‪ .(Digital TV‬ﻭﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ‬
‫ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺭﻕ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻓﱰﺓ‬
‫ﻟﺘﺄﺧﲑ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻛﻲ ‘ﻳﻨﺘﻈﺮ’ ﻭﺻﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ‪ .‬ﻭ ﹸﻳﻄﻠﻖ‬
‫ﻋﲆ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ؛ ‪) HD AV Sync‬ﺍﻟﺘﺰﺍﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﰐ ﺍﳌﺮﺋﻲ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ‪) U u‬ﰲ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ( ﻟﺘﻐﻴﲑ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺧﲑ ﺇﻣﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﺰﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﻘﺼﺎﻥ‪ ،‬ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻋﲆ ﺃﻱ‬
‫ﺭﻗﻢ ﺑﲔ ﺻﻔﺮ ﻭ‪ 300‬ﻣﻠﲇ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪Semi Karaoke‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎﺀ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ‪ /‬ﺍﻟﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ‪ /‬ﺍﳌﺴﺎﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪ ،‬ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﻫﺬﻩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﳎﻤﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ ﻋﲆ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﺼﻮﺕ ﻣﺮﺗﻔﻊ‪.‬‬
‫]‪[On‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎﺀ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻐﻨﺎﺀ ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﳎﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﻋﲆ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫]‪[Off‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﳌﺮﺗﻔﻊ ﻭﳎﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ ﻋﲆ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ‬
‫• ﺗﺘﺎﺡ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ‪ DVD‬ﻭ‪ DVD Karaoke‬ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﳍﺎ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺎﺭﻳﻦ ﳍﺬﻩ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺸﺎﻫﺪ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪ ،‬ﺃﻏﻠﻖ ‪ Semi Karaoke‬ﰲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ SETUP‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﻤﺘﻊ ﺑﻪ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻣﺎﻳﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﺤﻦ‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﱃ ﻓﺼﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻮﻝ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﰲ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪.DVD/CD‬‬
‫• ﺗﺘﻮﺍﻓﺮ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ‪ Semi Karaoke‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﳌﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ‬
‫ﻣﻮﺻ ﹰ‬
‫ﻼ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬
‫‪3:27:44‬‬
‫ﺇﻏﻼﻕ )ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﴘ(‬
‫‪2010-04-26‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻚ ﳍﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻷﻭﻝ ﻣﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﻮﺩ ﺍﳌﻨﻄﻘﺔ‬
‫)‪.(Area Code‬‬
‫‪ .2‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ‪.i‬‬
‫ﺕ ]‪ ،[Lock‬ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﺮﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺈﻧﺸﺎﺋﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﻣﺮﻭﺭ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ﺩﺧﻮﻝ )‪.(~ ENTER‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺧﻠﻬﺎ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮ￯ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ﺩﺧﻮﻝ )‪(~ ENTER‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻘﻖ‪ .‬ﺇﻥ ﺍﺭﺗﻜﺒﺖ ﺧﻄﺄ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ﺩﺧﻮﻝ‬
‫)~ ‪ ،(ENTER‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ﻣﺴﺢ )‪.(~ ENTER‬‬
‫‪ .3‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺛﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﱃ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ‪.U u‬‬
‫‪ .4‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ﺩﺧﻮﻝ )‪ (~ ENTER‬ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﲏ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ‪..U u‬‬
‫‪ .5‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ﺩﺧﻮﻝ )‪ (~ ENTER‬ﻟﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻛﻮﺩ ﺍﳌﻨﻄﻘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻴﻴﻢ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺣﻈﺮ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ ﺩﻱ ﰲ ﺩﻱ ﺍﳌﺼﻨﻔﺔ ﻋﲆ ﳏﺘﻮﺍﻫﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﲨﻴﻊ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﻣﺼﻨﻔﺔ‬
‫‪ .1‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺗﺼﻨﻴﻒ ]‪ [Rating‬ﰲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ]‪ [Lock‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﲆ ‪.i‬‬
‫‪ .2‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﻣﺮﻭﺭ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ﺩﺧﻮﻝ )‪.(~ ENTER‬‬
‫‪ .3‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺗﺼﻨﻴﻔﺎ ﻣﻦ ‪ 1‬ﺇﱃ ‪ 8‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ‪.U u‬‬
‫]‪[Rating 1-8‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻨﻴﻒ ﺭﻗﻢ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ )‪ (1‬ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻗﺪﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺼﻨﻴﻒ‬
‫ﺭﻗﻢ ﺛﲈﻧﻴﺔ )‪ (8‬ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﺃﻗﻞ ﻗﺪﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫]‪[Unlock‬‬
‫ﺇﻥ ﺣﺪﺩﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺢ‪ ،‬ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﴘ ﻏﲑ ﻧﺸﻂ ﻭﻳﻌﻤﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺑﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻃﺎﻗﺘﻪ‬
‫‪ .4‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ﺩﺧﻮﻝ )‪ (~ ENTER‬ﻟﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻨﻴﻒ‪.‬‬
‫‪HT905TAW-AL_DARELLK_ARA_9712.indd 28‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﱰﻛﻴﺐ‬
‫ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﻣﺮﻭﺭ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﻣﺮﻭﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻐﻴﲑﻫﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .1‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﻣﺮﻭﺭ ]‪ [Password‬ﰲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ]‪ [Lock‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ‪.i‬‬
‫‪ .2‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ‪.~ ENTER‬‬
‫‪ .3‬ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﳋﻄﻮﺓ ‪ 2‬ﻛﲈ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ )ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻨﻴﻒ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﻐﻴﲑ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﺮﻭﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ﺩﺧﻮﻝ )‪ (~ ENTER‬ﻋﻨﺪ‬
‫ﺗﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻐﻴﲑ ]‪ .[Change‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﻣﺮﻭﺭ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﲆ ﺩﺧﻮﻝ )‪ .(~ ENTER‬ﺃﺩﺧﻠﻬﺎ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮ￯ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﲆ ﺩﺧﻮﻝ )‪ (~ ENTER‬ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻘﻖ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .4‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ )‪ ( HOME‬ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻥ ﻧﺴﻴﺖ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﺮﻭﺭ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﺴﺤﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﺍﳋﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ﺃﺷﻴﺎﺀ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫‪DivX VOD‬‬
‫ﺇﻧﻨﺎ ﻧﻮﻓﺮ ﻟﻚ ﻛﻮﺩ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ‪) DivX® VOD‬ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﻄﻠﺐ( ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺌﺠﺎﺭ ﻭﴍﺍﺀ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ‪.DivX® VOD‬‬
‫ﳌﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺰﻳﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﳌﻮﻗﻊ ‪. www.karaoke.ru‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ‪ ~ ENTER‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﲤﻴﻴﺰ ]‪[DivX(R) VOD‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ‬
‫ﲨﻴﻊ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﳌﻨﺰﻟﺔ ﻣﻦ ‪ DivX® VOD‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻗﺮﺍﺋﺘﻬﺎ ﺇﻻ‬
‫ﻋﱪ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﱰﻛﻴﺐ‬
‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ‬
‫‪29‬‬
‫‪ .1‬ﺍﺧﱰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ]‪ [Setup‬ﰲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ]‪.[Home‬‬
‫‪ .2‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﺍﳌﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻦ ‪ 6‬ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ ”‪ “210499‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ‬
‫ﺩﺧﻮﻝ )~ ‪ .(ENTER‬ﺗﻢ ﻣﺴﺢ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﺮﻭﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﳌﻨﻄﻘﺔ‬
‫ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﳌﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻣﺖ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﲑﻫﺎ ﻟﺘﻘﻴﻴﻢ ﺃﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ ﻑ‬
‫ﻳﺪﻳﻮ ‪ ،DVD‬ﺑﻨﺎﺀ ﻋﲆ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﰲ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.45‬‬
‫‪ .1‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻛﻮﺩ ﺍﳌﻨﻄﻘﺔ ]‪ [Area Code‬ﰲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ]‪[Lock‬‬
‫ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ‪.i‬‬
‫‪ .2‬ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﳋﻄﻮﺓ ‪ 2‬ﻛﲈ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻔﻘﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ‬
‫)‪.(~ ENTER‬‬
‫‪ .3‬ﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ‪.U u‬‬
‫‪ .4‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ﺩﺧﻮﻝ )‪ (~ ENTER‬ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﲏ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ‪.U u‬‬
‫‪ .5‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ﺩﺧﻮﻝ )‪ (~ ENTER‬ﻟﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻛﻮﺩ ﺍﳌﻨﻄﻘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪3:27:44‬‬
‫‪2010-04-26‬‬
‫‪HT905TAW-AL_DARELLK_ARA_9712.indd 29‬‬
‫‪30‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬
‫)‪(Home Menu‬‬
‫‪ .1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪. HOME‬‬
‫ﻓﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﻟﻚ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ]‪.[Home‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫‪ .2‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﳋﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ‪.I i‬‬
‫‪ .3‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪) ~ ENTER‬ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﳋﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ‬
‫ﲢﺪﻳﺪﻫﺎ‪.‬‬
‫]‪) [Music‬ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ( ‪ :‬ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻟﻪ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ]‪[Music‬‬
‫)ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ(‪.‬‬
‫]‪) [Movie‬ﻓﻴﻠﻢ( ‪ :‬ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻗﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺧﻼﻟﻪ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ]‪) [MOVIE‬ﻓﻴﻠﻢ(‪.‬‬
‫]‪) [Photo‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ(‪ :‬ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻟﻪ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ]‪[PHOTO‬‬
‫)ﺻﻮﺭﺓ(‪.‬‬
‫]‪) [Setup‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ( ‪ :‬ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻟﻪ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ]‪) [Setup‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ‬
‫‪ .1‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪ Z OPEN/CLOSE‬ﺃﻭ ﻗﻢ‬
‫ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪ USB‬ﰲ ﻣﻨﻔﺬ ‪.USB‬‬
‫‪ .2‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪. HOME‬‬
‫ﻓﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﻟﻚ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ]‪.[Home‬‬
‫‪ .3‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﳋﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ‪.I i‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻙ ﺃﺣﺪ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳋﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ]‪) [Movie‬ﻓﻴﻠﻢ(‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ‬
‫]‪) [Photo‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ(‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ]‪) [Music‬ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ( ﺣﺎﻝ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪ USB‬ﻭﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺑﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺫﺍﺗﻪ‪،‬‬
‫ﹺﹴ‬
‫ﺣﻴﻨﺌﺬ ﺃﻥ‬
‫ﻓﺴﻮﻑ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﺳﻴﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ .‬ﻭﻋﻠﻴﻚ‬
‫ﲢﺪﺩ ﻭﺳﻴﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺛﻢ ﺗﻀﻐﻂ ﺯﺭ ‪.~ ENTER‬‬
‫‪ .4‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ ،~ ENTER‬ﺛﻢ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﳋﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﲢﺪﻳﺪﻫﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ‬
‫• ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﳌﻌﻈﻢ ﺃﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﳌﺪﳎﺔ ﻭﺃﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ،DVD-ROM‬ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋ ﹰﻴﺎ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﺍﳌﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﰲ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﲣﺰﻳﻦ‬
‫‪ USB‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ]ﺍﳌﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ[ ﺃﻭ ]ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ[ ﺃﻭ ]ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ[ ﰲ ﺣﺎﻝ‬
‫ﻋﺪﻡ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪ USB‬ﺃﻭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﱂ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺃﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪3:27:44‬‬
‫‪2010-04-26‬‬
‫‪HT905TAW-AL_DARELLK_ARA_9712.indd 30‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﻗﺮﺍﺀﺓ ﺍﳌﻠﻔﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻧﻔﺬ ﺫﻟﻚ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ‪x STOP‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ‬
‫‪B (PLAY)، MONO/‬‬
‫‪.STEREO‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻄﻲ ﺇﱃ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ‪/‬ﺍﳌﺴﺎﺭ‪/‬‬
‫ﺍﳌﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻼﺣﻖ‪/‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‬
‫ﺧﻼﻝ ﻗﺮﺍﺀﺓ ﺍﳌﻠﻔﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ‬
‫‪ ./> SKIP‬ﻟﻠﺬﻫﺎﺏ ﺇﱃ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ‪/‬ﺍﳌﺴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﱄ ﺃﻭ ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﱃ ﺑﺪﺍﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ‪/‬ﺍﳌﺴﺎﺭ ﺍﳊﺎﱄ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﺮﺗﲔ‬
‫ﻟﻔﱰﺓ ﻣﻮﺟﺰﺓ ﻋﲆ ‪. SKIP‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ‪/‬ﺍﳌﺴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‪.‬‬
‫ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺑﴪﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻣﻠﻒ ﺑﺘﻘﺪﻳﻤﻪ ﻟﻸﻣﺎﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺮﺟﻮﻉ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺨﻠﻒ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﺘﻜﺮﺭ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺸﻮﺍﺋﻲ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ ﻋﲆ‬
‫‪ ،s REPEAT‬ﻭﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﺭ ﺍﳊﺎﱄ‬
‫ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ ﺃﻭ ﻋﺸﻮﺍﺋﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺸﻮﺍﺋﻲ‪ :‬ﺍﳌﻠﻔﺎﺕ‬‫ﺍﳌﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬
‫ ‪DVD : Chapter/ Title/ Off‬‬‫ ‪DivX : Title/ All/ Off‬‬‫ ‪Audio CD/ MP3/ WMA :‬‬‫‪Track/ All/ Random/ Off‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ ﻋﲆ‬
‫‪ X PAUSE/STEP‬ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺑﺈﻃﺎﺭ‬
‫ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ‪.Frame-by-Frame‬‬
‫)‪ DVD، DivX‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‬
‫ﺧﻼﻝ ﻗﺮﺍﺀﺓ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺿﻐﻄﺎ‬
‫ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭﺍ ﻋﲆ ‪m/M SCAN‬‬
‫ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺑﴪﻋﺔ‬
‫ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﴎﻋﺔ ﺍﳌﺴﺢ ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﴪﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻣﻠﻒ ﺑﺘﻘﺪﻳﻤﻪ ﻟﻸﻣﺎﻡ‬
‫)‪،B (PLAY‬‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﻟﻠﺨﻠﻒ‬
‫)‪ .(MONO/STEREO‬ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﳌﺘﻜﺮﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﺸﻮﺍﺋﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﻋﲆ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻣﺘﻨﻮﻋﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﳌﺮﻛﺐ ﻋﲆ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ‪INFO/DISPLAY‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺍﺀﺓ ﺍﳌﺘﻨﻮﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﲣﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﳌﻮﺍﺩ ﺍﳌﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻨﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ .2‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻋﻨﴫ ﹰﺍ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ‪ U u‬ﻭﺗﻐﻴﲑ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻩ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ‬
‫‪ – Title‬ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﳊﺎﱄ‪/‬ﺇﲨﺎﱄ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﻭﻳﻦ‪.‬‬
‫‪ – Chapter‬ﺍﻧﺘﻘﻞ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ‪ /‬ﺍﳌﺴﺎﺭ ‪ /‬ﺍﳌﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ ‪/‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺎﱄ‪.‬‬
‫‪ – Time‬ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﻨﻘﴤ‪.‬‬
‫‪ – Audio‬ﻟﻐﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻗﻨﺎﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﳌﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻣﺆﻗﺖ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻞ ‪.X PAUSE/STEP‬‬
‫‪31‬‬
‫‪ – Subtitle‬ﺍﻟﱰﲨﺔ ﺍﳌﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ – Angle‬ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﳌﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻹﲨﺎﱄ ﻟﻠﺰﻭﺍﻳﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ‬
‫ﺇﻥ ﱂ ﻳﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ﺃﻱ ﺯﺭ ﻟﻌﺪﺓ ﺛﻮﺍﻥ ﻗﻠﻴﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﳜﺘﻔﻲ ﺍﳌﻌﺮﻭﺽ‬
‫ﻋﲆ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﰲ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﳌﺆﻗﺖ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ‬
‫ﺑﻄﻲﺀ )‪(SLOW‬‬
‫)‪ BB‬ﺃﻭ ‪ (bb‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﴪﻋﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺒﻄﺌﺔ ﴎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫)‪ DVD، DivX‬ﻓﻘﻂ( ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﺑﻄﺎﺀ‬
‫ﻣﻠﻒ ‪ DivX‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻟﻠﺨﻠﻒ‪.‬‬
‫‪3:27:44‬‬
‫‪2010-04-26‬‬
‫‪HT905TAW-AL_DARELLK_ARA_9712.indd 31‬‬
‫‪32‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﻱ ﰲ ﺩﻱ )‪(DVD Menu‬‬
‫ﺑﺪﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺯﻣﻨﻴﺔ ﳏﺪﺩﺓ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺩﻱ ﰲ ﺩﻱ ﺑﻪ ﻋﺪﺓ ﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ‬
‫ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﰲ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ )‪.(Menu‬‬
‫ﻟﺒﺪﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺃﻱ ﻭﻗﺖ ﻣﻌﲔ ﰲ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ‪.‬‬
‫‪DVD‬‬
‫‪ .1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪.DISC MENU‬‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .2‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪.U u I i‬‬
‫‪ .3‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻟﻠﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫)‪(B (PLAY)، MONO/STEREO‬‬
‫ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺩﻱ ﰲ ﺩﻱ‬
‫‪DVD‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺩﻱ ﰲ ﺩﻱ ﺑﻪ ﻋﺪﺓ ﻋﻨﺎﻭﻳﻦ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻴﻪ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺎ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫‪ .1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ )‪.(TITLE‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‬
‫‪ .3‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻟﻠﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫)‪(B (PLAY)، MONO/STEREO‬‬
‫‪DVD‬‬
‫ﺗﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﴪﻋﺔ ‪ 1.5‬ﺑﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﺍﻻﺳﺘﲈﻉ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
‫ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺃﴎﻉ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﲆ ﺍﻟﴪﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .1‬ﺧﻼﻝ ﻗﺮﺍﺀﺓ ﺍﳌﻠﻔﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪B (PLAY)،‬‬
‫‪ MONO/STEREO‬ﻟﺒﺪﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﴪﻋﺔ ﺗﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﺮﺓ‬
‫ﻭﻧﺼﻒ‪ .‬ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ”‪ “B x1.5‬ﻋﲆ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .2‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪ B (PLAY)، MONO/STEREO‬ﻣﺮﺓ‬
‫ﺃﺧﺮ￯ ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ‪.‬‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻒ‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﱰﻙ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﰲ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪Stop‬‬
‫)ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ( ﳌﺪﺓ ﺣﻮﺍﱄ ﲬﺲ ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻖ‪.‬‬
‫‪3:27:45‬‬
‫‪2010-04-26‬‬
‫‪ .1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ﻋﺮﺽ ) ‪ ( INFO/DISPLAY‬ﺧﻼﻝ ﻗﺮﺍﺀﺓ‬
‫ﺍﳌﻠﻔﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .2‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ‪ U u‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺃﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻭﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ‬
‫”‪.“--:--:--‬‬
‫‪ .3‬ﺃﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺀ ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﰲ ﺧﺎﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺪﻗﺎﺋﻖ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﺜﻮﺍﲏ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ ﻟﻠﻴﻤﲔ‪ .‬ﺇﻥ ﺃﺩﺧﻠﺖ ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻣﺎ ﺧﺎﻃﺌﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﲆ ﻣﺴﺢ )‪ (CLEAR‬ﻹﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺃﺩﺧﻠﺘﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﺛﻢ ﺃﺩﺧﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﲆ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﱃ ﻣﺸﻬﺪ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﱃ ﻭﻋﴩ‬
‫ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻖ ﻭﻋﴩﻳﻦ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ”‪ “11020‬ﻋﱪ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .4‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ﺩﺧﻮﻝ )‪ (~ ENTER‬ﻟﻠﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺗﺒﺪﺃ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﳌﺤﺪﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺌﻨﺎﻑ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫‪ .2‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ‪.U u I i‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪ DVD‬ﺑﴪﻋﺔ ‪ 1.5‬ﻣﺮﺓ‬
‫‪DivX DVD‬‬
‫‪DVD‬‬
‫‪DivX‬‬
‫‪ACD‬‬
‫‪MP3‬‬
‫‪WMA‬‬
‫ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺑﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺿﻐﻄﺖ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﻋﲆ ‪x‬‬
‫)‪ (STOP‬ﻭﻓ ﹰﻘﺎ ﻟﻸﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻇﻬﺮﺕ " ‪) Xx‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺌﻨﺎﻑ(" ﻋﲆ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﳐﺘﴫ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ‬
‫‪B (PLAY)، MONO/STEREO‬ﻻﺳﺘﺌﻨﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫)ﻣﻦ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﳌﺸﻬﺪ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ‪) x‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ( ﻣﺮﺗﲔ ﺃﻭ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﻔﺮﻳﻎ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ "‪) "x‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺎﻡ( ﻋﲆ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ .‬ﺳﻮﻑ‬
‫ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺑﻤﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﻮﻗﻔﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﺴﺢ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺌﻨﺎﻑ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )ﻣﺜﻞ ‪1‬‬
‫)ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ( ﻭ ‪ Z‬ﻓﺘﺢ‪/‬ﻏﻠﻖ‪...‬ﺇﻟﺦ(‪.‬‬
‫‪HT905TAW-AL_DARELLK_ARA_9712.indd 32‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬
‫‪MP3‬‬
‫‪ACD‬‬
‫‪WMA‬‬
‫ﺗﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺗﻚ ﺍﳌﻔﻀﻠﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ‬
‫ﻗﺮﺹ ﺃﻭ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪ USB‬ﰲ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .1‬ﺍﺧﱰ ]‪) [Music‬ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ( ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ]‪) [Home‬ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪) Music‬ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﻟﻠﺤﺎﻓﻈﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪MP3/) .‬‬
‫‪ WMA‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‬
‫ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ ﻭﻓ ﹰﻘﺎ‬
‫ﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ‪ ID3TAG‬ﰲ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﳌﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ‬
‫ﺍﳌﻼﺋﻢ‪ MP3) .‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‬
‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﰲ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﳌﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺧﱰ‬
‫]‪) [Select All‬ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻜﻞ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪) .~ ENTER‬ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻹﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬
‫‪ .1‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ‪ U u‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﰲ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺘﻪ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺍﳌﻠﻒ ﺍﳌﺤﺪﹼ ﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .2‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ‪.MARKER‬‬
‫ﳊﺬﻑ ﲨﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ‪ U u I i‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]‪) [Deselect All‬ﻋﺪﻡ‬
‫ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻜﻞ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪) ~ ENTER‬ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ( ﰲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ‬
‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .2‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﳌﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ]‪ [List‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ‬
‫‪ ،U u‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪) MARKER‬ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ( ﻛﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ‬
‫ﻋﲆ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .3‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ ~ ENTER‬ﺃﻭ‬
‫‪.B (PLAY)، MONO/STEREO‬‬
‫ﻓﻴﻈﻬﺮ ﻟﻚ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .4‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ‪ ،U u‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺯﺭ‬
‫‪.~ ENTER‬‬
‫ﺗﺘﻢ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﹰ‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺃﻭ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪ ،USB‬ﻭﻳﺘﻢ‬
‫ﲢﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺇﱃ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺃﻭ ﲢﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺇﱃ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺃﺧﺮ￯‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﲑ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﱰﲨﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ‬
‫ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ‪/‬ﺍﳌﻠﻔﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪/‬ﺍﳌﻠﻔﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﱃ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪33‬‬
‫‪DivX‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﱂ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﱰﲨﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺍﳌﻼﺋﻢ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﲑ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﺭﻣﺰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﱰﲨﺔ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﱰﲨﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺍﳌﻼﺋﻢ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .1‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺯﺭ ‪INFO/DISPLAY‬‬
‫ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﲆ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫‪ .2‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ U u‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ]‪.[Code Page‬‬
‫‪ .3‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ I i‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .4‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ‪ O RETURN‬ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﲆ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫]‪[Mark Play‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫]‪[Current Play‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻲ‬
‫‪3:27:45‬‬
‫‪2010-04-26‬‬
‫‪HT905TAW-AL_DARELLK_ARA_9712.indd 33‬‬
‫‪34‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺻﻮﺭ ‪JPG‬‬
‫ﺣﻮﻝ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪) help‬ﺍﳌﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ( ﰲ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪JPG‬‬
‫ﺗﺴﺘﻄﻴﻊ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﲠﺎ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺻﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .1‬ﺍﺧﱰ ]‪) [Photo‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ( ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ]‪) [Home‬ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ( ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪) ~ ENTER‬ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ]‪) [Photo‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ(‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ‬
‫‪Menu‬‬
‫‪INFO/‬‬
‫‪DISPLAY‬‬
‫‪b/B‬‬
‫‪Prev./‬‬
‫‪Next‬‬
‫ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﱃ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪O Close‬‬
‫‪I/i‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪RETURN‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪Option‬‬
‫)ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﱃ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺁﺧﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﱃ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬
‫]‪) [Photo‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﳋﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﰲ ﻭﺿﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﻟﻠﺤﺎﻓﻈﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫‪ .1‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﰲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫‪ INFO/DISPLAY‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﳋﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .2‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﳋﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ‪.U u I i‬‬
‫‪ .2‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ U u‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪~ ENTER‬‬
‫)ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ(‪.‬‬
‫‪ .3‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﰲ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻟﻠﴩﺍﺋﺢ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪U u‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻠﻒ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫‪.B (PLAY)، MONO/STEREO‬‬
‫ﺣﻮﻝ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪) help‬ﺍﳌﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ( ﰲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ]‪) [Photo‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ‬
‫‪BSlide‬‬
‫‪Show‬‬
‫‪B (PLAY)،‬‬
‫‪MONO/‬‬
‫‪STEREO‬‬
‫‪vVbB‬‬
‫‪Move‬‬
‫‪UuIi‬‬
‫‪~ ENTER ~ Select‬‬
‫‪O Close‬‬
‫‪3:27:45‬‬
‫‪2010-04-26‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪RETURN‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﺮﺽ‬
‫ﻟﻠﴩﺍﺋﺢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﱃ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﳏﺘﻮ￯ ﺁﺧﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻣﻌﲔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬
‫]‪) [Home‬ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫‪a‬‬
‫‪b‬‬
‫‪c‬‬
‫‪d‬‬
‫‪e‬‬
‫‪ a‬ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪/‬ﲨﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ – .‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ I i‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺳﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪/‬ﺗﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ –Slide Show N/ X b‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ ،~ ENTER‬ﻟﺒﺪﺀ‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻟﻠﴩﺍﺋﺢ‪.‬‬
‫‪ – Speed x3/ x2/ x1 c‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺯﺭ ‪~ ENTER‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﱰﺓ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻴﺔ ﺑﲔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﰲ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻟﻠﴩﺍﺋﺢ‪.‬‬
‫‪ – Rotate d‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ ~ ENTER‬ﻟﻠﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ – Go to list e‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪~ ENTER‬ﻟﻠﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﱃ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬
‫]‪) [Photo‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ(‪.‬‬
‫‪HT905TAW-AL_DARELLK_ARA_9712.indd 34‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻡ‬
‫ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ‪ -‬ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻱ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ﻧﻮﻡ )‪ (SLEEP‬ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺟﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺑﲔ ‪ 10‬ﻭ‪ 180‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‪ ،‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﳚﺐ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﳌﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﲆ‪PAUSE/STEP‬‬
‫)ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ‪ /‬ﺧﻄﻮﺓ( )‪ (X‬ﻷﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ﲬﺲ ﺛﻮﺍﻥ ﻟﺘﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ‪(PAL/ NTSC) ..‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﳌﺘﺒﻘﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ﻧﻮﻡ )‪.(SLEEP‬‬
‫ﻹﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﺧﺎﺻﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻡ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺿﻐﻄﺎ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭﺍ ﻋﲆ ‪ SLEEP‬ﺇﱃ‬
‫ﺃﻥ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ”‪ ،“SLEEP 10‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ SLEEP‬ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮ￯ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ‬
‫ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ”‪.“SLEEP 10‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ‬
‫ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺇﺫﺍ ﱂ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪ USB‬ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﳌﺘﺒﻘﻲ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ‪ SLEEP‬ﻭﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﳌﺘﺒﻘﻲ ﰲ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺴﲈﻋﺔ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮ￯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻟﻜﻞ ﺳﲈﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﳐﻔﻒ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﺀﺓ‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻣﺆﻗﺘﺎ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ﺻﺎﻣﺖ ) ‪ (MUTE‬ﻹﺧﻔﺎﺀ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺑﺘﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﲆ ‪) SPEAKER LEVEL‬ﻣﺴﺘﻮ￯‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﲈﻋﺔ( ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺴﲈﻋﺔ ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .2‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ‪ VOL -/+‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮ￯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻟﻠﺴﲈﻋﺔ‬
‫ﺍﳌﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻮ￯ ﻋﲆ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫‪ .3‬ﻛﺮﺭ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳋﻄﻮﺓ ﻭﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮ￯ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﲈﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺮ￯‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻓﺾ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻛﺘﻢ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻟﻠﺮﺩ ﻋﲆ ﺍﳍﺎﺗﻒ ﻋﲆ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ‪،‬‬
‫ﻭﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ‪" MUTE‬ﺻﺎﻣﺖ" ﰲ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺘﺎﻉ ﺑﺎﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻣﺜﻞ ﻛﺎﺭﻳﻮﻛﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﲣﻔﻴﺾ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮ￯ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﳌﻐﻨﻲ ﰲ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﻣﺘﻨﻮﻉ‪.‬‬
‫)‪ ...MP3/ WMA/ CD‬ﺍﻟﺦ(‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ "‪،" VOCAL FADER‬ﻭﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ ﰲ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫"‪"VOCAL FADER‬‬
‫ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺑﺤﻔﻆ ﺍﳌﺸﻬﺪ ﺍﻷﺧﲑ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻷﺧﲑ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺿﻪ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﺒﻘﻰ ﺍﳌﺸﻬﺪ ﺍﻷﺧﲑ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻟﻮ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺈﺧﺮﺍﺝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺸﻐﻞ ﺃﻭ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‬
‫)ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﺪﺍﺩ(‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺤﻤﻴﻞ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺗﻢ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﳌﺸﻬﺪ ﺑﻪ‪،‬‬
‫ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺪﻋﺎﺀ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﳌﺸﻬﺪ ﺃﻭﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﻜ ﹰﻴﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻹﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﺫﻟﻚ‪،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ " ‪ " VOCAL FADER‬ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮ￯‪.‬‬
‫‪DVD‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ‪ SLEEP‬ﻣﺮﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪ .‬ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﻘﻞ ﺇﺿﺎﺀﺓ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺑﻤﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻨﺼﻒ‪ .‬ﻭﻟﻺﻟﻐﺎﺀ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺑﺘﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﲆ ‪SLEEP‬‬
‫ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﳋﻔﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﳌﺸﻬﺪ ﺍﻷﺧﲑ‬
‫‪35‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﲣﺘﻠﻒ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ‪ VOCAL FADER‬ﺣﺴﺐ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ‬
‫• ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻣﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﳌﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ‬
‫ﻣﺘﺼ ﹰ‬
‫ﻼ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻭﻫﻮ ﻟﻴﺲ ﹸﻣﺘﺎﺡ ﻋﲆ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﻣﻮﻧﻮ )‪(MONO‬‬
‫‪3:27:46‬‬
‫‪2010-04-26‬‬
‫‪HT905TAW-AL_DARELLK_ARA_9712.indd 35‬‬
‫‪36‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺫﺍﻋﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ ﻫﻮﺍﺋﻲ ‪ FM‬ﻭ‪.AM‬‬
‫)ﺍﺭﺟﻊ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪(24‬‬
‫ﺍﻻﺳﺘﲈﻉ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺩﻳﻮ‬
‫‪ .1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ﺧﺎﺻﻴﺔ )‪.(t RADIO&INPUT‬‬
‫ﺇﱃ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ‪ FM‬ﺃﻭ )‪ AM (MW‬ﻋﲆ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺳﺘﻜﻮﻥ ﺁﺧﺮ ﳏﻄﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﻠﻤﺔ ﻫﻲ ﺍﳌﺤﻄﺔ ﺍﳌﻮﻟﻔﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .2‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﲆ )‪ TUNING (-/+‬ﳌﺪﺓ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺘﲔ ﺇﱃ ﺃﻥ‬
‫ﺗﺒﺪﺃ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﱰﺩﺩ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺘﻐﲑ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺣﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﳌﺴﺢ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ‬
‫ﺗﺒﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﰲ ﺗﻮﻟﻴﻒ ﳏﻄﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺿﻐﻄﺎ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭﺍ ﻋﲆ )‪.TUNING (-/+‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫‪ .3‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺑﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ‪ VOLUME‬ﺍﳌﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﰲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﺿﻐﻄﺎ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭﺍ ﻋﲆ‬
‫) ‪ VOL (+/-‬ﰲ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﳏﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺩﻳﻮ ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺎ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ‪ 50‬ﻗﻨﺎﺓ ‪ FM‬ﻭ)‪ AM (MW‬ﺿﺒﻄﺎ ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻟﻴﻒ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ﺧﺎﺻﻴﺔ )‪ (t RADIO&INPUT‬ﺇﱃ ﺃﻥ‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ‪ FM‬ﺃﻭ )‪AM (MW‬ﻋﲆ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .2‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﱰﺩﺩ ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ﺗﻮﻟﻴﻒ‬
‫)‪TUNING (-/+‬‬
‫‪ .3‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ‪ ،~ ENTER‬ﻭﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﻮﻣﺾ ﻋﺪﺩ ﳏﺪﺩ ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺎ‬
‫ﻋﲆ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .4‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ )‪ PRESET (-/+‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﺍﳌﻀﺒﻮﻁ ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺎ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .5‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ‪.~ ENTER‬‬
‫ﻓﺴﻮﻑ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﳌﺤﻄﺔ ﳐﺰﻧﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .6‬ﻛﺮﺭ ﺍﳋﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﻣﻦ ‪ 2‬ﺇﱃ ‪ 5‬ﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﳏﻄﺎﺕ ﺃﺧﺮ￯‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﺢ ﻛﻞ ﺍﳌﺤﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺤﻔﻮﻇﺔ‬
‫‪ .1‬ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ‪ CLEAR‬ﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺘﲔ ﺗﻘﺮﻳ ﹰﺒﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﻮﻣﺾ ‪) ERASE ALL‬ﳏﻮ ﺍﻟﻜﻞ( ﰲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ‪.DVD‬‬
‫‪ .2‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ‪ CLEAR‬ﳌﺤﻮ ﻛﻞ ﳏﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺩﻳﻮ ﺍﳌﺤﻔﻮﻇﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﳏﻄﺔ ﳏﻔﻮﻇﺔ‬
‫‪ .1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ‪ PRESET - / +‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﻣﺴﺒﻖ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﰲ ﺣﺬﻓﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .2‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ‪) CLEAR‬ﻣﺴﺢ( ﻭﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﻮﻣﺾ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﻣﺴﺒﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﰲ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .3‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ‪) CLEAR‬ﻣﺴﺢ( ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮ￯ ﳊﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﻣﺴﺒﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍ ﹸﳌﺤﺪﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﲢﺴﲔ ﺍﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ﺇﻑ ﺇﻡ ‪FM‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ)‪ B (PLAY)، MONO/STEREO‬ﻣﻦ ﻋﲆ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‪ .‬ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺇﱄ ﺗﻐﻴﲑ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺳﱰﻳﻮ ﺇﱃ‬
‫ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ ﻭﺩﺍﺋﲈ ﻣﺎ ﳛﺴﻦ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫‪3:27:46‬‬
‫‪2010-04-26‬‬
‫‪HT905TAW-AL_DARELLK_ARA_9712.indd 36‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
‫ﻋﲆ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫‪GAME‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ "ﳏﻴﻄﻲ"‬
‫‪NIGHT‬‬
‫ﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺑﻪ ﳎﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺷﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺠﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺠﻬﺰﺓ ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻴﻪ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻨﻐﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ‪SOUND EFFECT‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﲑ ‪ SOUND EFFECT‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻷﺳﻬﻢ‬
‫‪ I i‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ‪.SOUND EFFECT‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﴏ ﺍﳌﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻨﻈﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ "‪ "Equalizer‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ‬
‫ﲣﺘﻠﻒ ﺑﺤﺴﺐ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻭﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻭﺑﺤﺴﺐ ﺍﳌﺆﺛﺮﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﲆ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫‪NAT PLUS‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺍﳌﺤﲇ‬
‫ﳌﻨﻈﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪:‬‬
‫‪AUTO EQ‬‬
‫‪POP‬‬
‫‪CLASSIC‬‬
‫‪JAZZ‬‬
‫‪ROCK‬‬
‫‪BASS‬‬
‫‪CLRVOICE‬‬
‫‪3:27:46‬‬
‫‪2010-04-26‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺘﺎﻉ ﺑﺼﻮﺕ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺮﻳﺢ‪.‬‬
‫‪.‬ﻣﺆﺛﺮﺍﺕ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﺇﻗﻠﻴﻤﻴﺔ ﻣﺜﲇ‬
‫‪(DANGDUT/ ARABIC/‬‬
‫‪PERSIAN/ INDIA/‬‬
‫‪REGUETON/‬‬
‫‪MERENGUE/‬‬
‫‪SAMBA/ SALSA/‬‬
‫)‪CUMBIA/ AFRO‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﲆ ﻣﻨﻈﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻷﻛﺜﺮ ﺗﺸﺎﲠ ﹰﺎ‬
‫ﻣﻊ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﳌﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﺍﳌﺸﺘﻤﻠﺔ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻏﺎﲏ ‪MP3 ID3 Tag‬‬
‫‪LOUDNESS‬‬
‫‪VIRTUAL‬‬
‫‪PLII MOVIE‬‬
‫‪PLII MUSIC‬‬
‫‪BYPASS‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺘﺎﻉ ﺑﺼﻮﺕ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻭﺍﻗﻌﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﻟﻌﺐ ﺃﻟﻌﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﹸﻣﻔﻴﺪﺓ ﺇﺫﺍ‬
‫ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﰲ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻋﲆ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ ﰲ ﺃﻭﻗﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻣﺘﺄﺧﺮﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﲈﻉ ﺇﱃ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ‪ MP3‬ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﻏﲑﻫﺎ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﺍﳌﻀﻐﻮﻃﺔ‪،‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﲢﺴﲔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪ .‬ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ‬
‫ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻟﻠﻤﺼﺎﺩﺭ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺗﲔ‪.‬‬
‫ﹸﻳﻌﺰﺯ ﺍﳋﻔﻴﺾ ﻭﺍﻟﱰﺩﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺘﺎﻉ ﺑﺎﳌﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﻭﻟﺒﻲ ﺑﺮﻭ ﻟﻮﺟﻴﻚ ‪II "Dolby Pro‬‬
‫‪ " Logic II‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺳﱰﻳﻮ "ﳎﺴﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ" ﻋﲆ ﻗﻨﺎﺓ ‪5.1‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺘﺎﻉ ﺑﺎﳌﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ‬
‫‪NATURAL‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺘﺎﻉ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﳋﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪RETOUCH‬‬
‫‪37‬‬
‫• ﰲ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺤﻴﻄﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﺴﻤﻊ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﲈﻋﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺻﻮﲥﺎ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﺮﺟﻊ ﻟﻠﺒﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﳌﺤﻴﻄﺔ ﻭﻣﺼﺪﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪ ،‬ﻭﻻ ﻳﻌﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻋﻴﺒﺎ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﲢﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﱃ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﳉﻮ ﺍﳌﺤﻴﻂ‪ ،‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﻓﺘﺢ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻞ‪ ،‬ﺑﻞ‬
‫ﺃﺣﻴﺎﻧﺎ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﻐﻴﲑ ﻣﺴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻀﻔﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﱪﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺟﻮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳊﲈﺳﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺕ ﺑﲈ ﻳﻤﻨﺤﻚ ﺷﻌﻮﺭ ﹰﺍ ﺑﺄﻧﻚ ﰲ‬
‫ﺣﻔﻠﺔ ﺣﻘﻴﻘﺔ ﻟﻠﺮﻭﻙ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺒﻮﺏ ﺃﻭ ﺍﳉﺎﺯ‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﻟﻠﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻼﺳﻴﻜﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﺰﻳﺰ ﺗﺄﺛﲑ ﺻﻮﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﱰﺩﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﱰﺩﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ‬
‫)ﺍﳋﻔﻴﺾ( ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﳌﺤﻴﻄﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﱪﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻋﲆ ﺟﻌﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
‫ﻧﻘ ﹰﻴﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﳛﺴﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﺸﺠﻊ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﱪﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬
‫)ﻭﻧﺤﻦ ﹼ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺗﻚ ﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻗﻨﺎﺓ ‪.(5.1‬‬
‫‪HT905TAW-AL_DARELLK_ARA_9712.indd 37‬‬
‫‪38‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ‬
‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ‬
‫•‬
‫ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺇﱃ "‪"USB‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺇﱃ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪ USB‬ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻠﻪ ﺑﺎﳌﻨﻔﺬ ﺍﳋﺎﺹ ﺑﻪ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .1‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪ USB‬ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .2‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻟﻪ‪ .‬ﺃﻋﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺃﻭ ﹰ‬
‫ﻻ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .3‬ﻭﺍﺑﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ﺯﺭ ‪.z REC‬‬
‫‪ .4‬ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺯﺭ ‪.x STOP‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫]ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪ /‬ﺍﳌﻠﻔﺎﺕ[‬
‫ﻳﺴﺠﻞ ﻋﲆ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪ USB‬ﰲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﱢ‬
‫]ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﱪﻧﺎﻣﺞ[‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﻋﲆ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ )ﺍﳌﻠﻔﺎﺕ( ﺍﳌﺮﺍﺩ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻪ‬
‫ﺇﱃ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪) USB‬ﺍﺭﺟﻊ ﺇﱃ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(33‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﲡﺴﻴﻠﻪ ﻛﲈ ﻳﲇ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ ﺍﳌﺪﳎﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺔ‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﻣﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﳌﺌﻮﻳﺔ ﳌﻌﺪﻝ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ "‪ "USB‬ﻋﲆ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ )ﺃﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ ﻣﺪﳎﺔ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ‬
‫)ﺃﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ ﻣﺪﳎﺔ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ ‪ MP3/ WMA‬ﻣﺪﳎﺔ‬
‫ﻓﻘﻂ(‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻭﻳﻨﺎﻣﺐ ‪ /‬ﺇﻡ ﰊ ﺛﺮﻱ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪،‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ‬
‫ﺗﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻪ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻈﻪ ) ﻓﻘﻂ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﻀﻐﻮﻃﺔ(‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻨﺰﻉ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ "‪ "USB‬ﺃﻭ ﺗﻄﻔﺊ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺇﱃ‬
‫"‪ ."USB‬ﻭﺇﻻ‪،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻧﺎﻗﺼﺔ ﻭﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﺴﺤﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﳌﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻧﺎﺕ ﻏﲑ ﻣﺘﺎﺡ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺇﱃ "‪ "USB‬ﻻ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ‪،‬ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻣﺜﻞ " ﻻ‬
‫ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ‪ "USB‬ﺃﻭ " ﺧﻄﺄ " ﺃﻭ " ﻻ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ" ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻋﲆ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻗﺎﺭﺋﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﺃﻭ ‪HDD‬‬
‫ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ‪.USB‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ ﻋﲆ ‪ 128‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ )ﺳﺎﻋﺘﺎﻥ ﺗﻘﺮﻳ ﹰﺒﺎ( ﻋﻨﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻟﻔﱰﺓ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﺃﻗﻞ ﻣﻦ ‪ 4‬ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﹸﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﲣﺰﻳﻦ‬
‫ﺍﳌﻠﻒ‪.‬‬
‫ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ‪ ،CD-G‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ،DTS‬ﺳﻴﺘﻌﺬﺭ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪.USB‬‬
‫ﺍﳌﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﰲ ﺍﳌﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺧﻼﻝ‬
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﲨﻴﻊ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻦ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ‪ 999‬ﻣﻠﻒ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺗﺮﻗﻴﻢ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﺍﻷﻗﻞ‪ .‬ﻟﺬﻟﻚ ﺇﺫﺍ‬
‫ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺤﺬﻑ ﺑﻌﺾ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻓﺈﻥ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﱄ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻫﻮ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﺍﻷﻗﻞ ﻓﻴﲈ ﺑﲔ ﺍﳌﻠﻔﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪MP3/ WMA‬‬
‫ﺍﳌﺼﺎﺩﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺮ￯‪.‬‬
‫)‪Tuner، AUX،‬‬
‫‪(Portable‬‬
‫‪3:27:46‬‬
‫‪2010-04-26‬‬
‫ﺇﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﻌﻤﻞ ﻧﺴﺦ ﻏﲑ ﻣﺮﺧﺼﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﻮﺍﺩ ﺍﳌﺤﻤﻴﺔ ﺿﺪ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ‪ ،‬ﺑﲈ ﰲ‬
‫ﺫﻟﻚ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺑﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺒﺚ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪ ،‬ﻳﻌﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎﻛ ﹰﺎ ﻟﻘﻮﺍﻧﲔ ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻨﴩ ﻭﻳﻤﺜﻞ ﺍﻋﺘﺪﺍﺀ ﳎﺮﻡ‪ .‬ﻻ ﳚﻮﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﳉﻬﺎﺯ ﳍﺬﻩ ﺍﻷﻏﺮﺍﺽ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﻦ ﻋﲆ ﻗﺪﺭ ﺍﳌﺴﺌﻮﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﺣﱰﻡ ﻗﻮﺍﻧﲔ ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻨﴩ‬
‫‪HT905TAW-AL_DARELLK_ARA_9712.indd 38‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﻜﻨﻮﻟﻮﺟﻴﺎ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ‬
‫ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ®‪ Bluetooth‬ﻫﻲ ﺗﻜﻨﻮﻟﻮﺟﻴﺎ ﻟﻼﺗﺼﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻼﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻗﺼﲑ ﺍﳌﺪ￯‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﳌﺪ￯ ﺍﳌﺘﺎﺡ ﰲ ﺣﺪﻭﺩ ‪ 10‬ﻣﱰ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ‬
‫ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﻜﻨﻮﻟﻮﺟﻴﺎ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﳚﺐ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﻗﺎﺩﺭﺓ ﻋﲆ ﺗﺮﲨﺔ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ‪ .‬ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‬
‫ﻣﺘﻮﺍﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﱄ‪.‬‬
‫‪A2DP‬ﺏ )ﻣﻠﻒ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﳌﺘﻘﺪﻡ(‬
‫‪) AVRCP‬ﻣﻠﻒ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﰲ ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ(‬
‫‪3:27:47‬‬
‫‪2010-04-26‬‬
‫ﺍﻻﺳﺘﲈﻉ ﺇﱃ ﺍﳌﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ‬
‫ﻋﱪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ ﻣﻊ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ‬
‫ﻭﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺀ ﰲ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺑﻂ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ‬
‫ﻣﻊ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﺍﳋﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ‪ .‬ﺍﺭﺟﻊ ﺇﱃ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ‪ .‬ﻭﺑﻤﺠﺮﺩ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺑﻂ ﻓﻠﻦ ﲢﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﱃ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺅﻫﺎ‬
‫ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮ￯‪.‬‬
‫‪ .1‬ﺍﺧﱰ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬
‫‪.t RADIO&INPUT‬‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ "‪ "BT‬ﺛﻢ "‪ "BT READY‬ﰲ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .2‬ﺷﻐﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺑﻂ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ‬
‫ﻋﻦ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺑﺎﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﺜﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﰲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ‬
‫ﺣﺴﺐ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ‪ .‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ ﻛـ‬
‫"‪."LG Audio‬‬
‫‪ .3‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﴢ )‪.(PIN‬‬
‫ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﴢ‪0000 :‬‬
‫‪ .4‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﻧﺠﺎﺡ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ‪ ،‬ﻳﴤﺀ ﺻﲈﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺀ ﺍﳌﺰﺩﻭﺝ ﻟﻠﺒﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﰲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻭﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ‬
‫"‪."BT SINK‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ‬
‫)ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻧﻘﻄﺎﻉ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﳌﻮﺟﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻟﻴﻜﱰﻭﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﺧﺮ￯ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻐﺮﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺧﺮ￯‪(.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻔﺮﺽ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺗﻮﺻﻞ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺩﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﻜﻨﻮﻟﻮﺟﻴﺎ‬
‫®‪ Bluetooth‬ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﺃﻱ ﻣﺼﺎﺭﻳﻒ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﳍﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﳉﻮﺍﻝ ﺍﳌﺰﻭﺩ ﺑﺘﻜﻨﻮﻟﻮﺟﻴﺎ ®‪ Bluetooth‬ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﻜﻨﻮﻟﻮﺟﻴﺎ‬
‫®‪ Bluetooth‬ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﳌﺘﺎﺣﺔ‪ :‬ﺍﳍﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﳉﻮﺍﻝ‬
‫ﻭﻣﺸﻐﻞ ‪ MP3‬ﻭﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﳌﺤﻤﻮﻝ ﻭ‪) PDA‬ﳚﺐ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ‬
‫ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺗﺪﻋﻢ ﺳﲈﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺱ ﺍﻻﺳﱰﻳﻮ‪(.‬‬
‫‪39‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﰲ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﳐﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻟﻠﺮﺑﻂ‪ ،‬ﺣﺴﺐ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ‪.‬‬
‫‪HT905TAW-AL_DARELLK_ARA_9712.indd 39‬‬
‫‪40‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ‬
‫‪ .5‬ﺍﻻﺳﺘﲈﻉ ﺇﱃ ﺍﳌﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ‬
‫ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﺍﳌﺨﺰﻧﺔ ﻋﲆ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﺍﳋﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ‪،‬‬
‫ﺍﺭﺟﻊ ﺇﱃ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﺍﳋﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ‬
‫• ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﲑ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﰲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻓﺼﻞ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﺑﻂ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮ￯‪.‬‬
‫)ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ‪ y‬ﺍﻟﺒﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﺑﺨﻼﻑ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ(‬
‫• ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ‪ AVRCP‬ﻣﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﰲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻻﺳﺘﲈﻉ ﺇﱃ ﺍﳌﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﻣﻦ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﺑﻂ ﺑﲔ ﻭﺣﺪﺗﻚ ﻭﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ‬
‫ﻭﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺀ ﰲ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺑﻂ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ‬
‫ﻣﻊ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﺍﳋﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ‪ .‬ﺍﺭﺟﻊ ﺇﱃ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ‪ .‬ﻭﺑﻤﺠﺮﺩ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺑﻂ ﻓﻠﻦ ﲢﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﱃ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺅﻫﺎ‬
‫ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮ￯‪.‬‬
‫‪ .1‬ﺍﺧﱰ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻏﲑ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫‪.t RADIO&INPUT‬‬
‫‪ .2‬ﺿﻊ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﺍﳌﺮﺍﺩ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻠﻪ ﲠﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﰲ ﺣﺪﻭﺩ ‪1‬‬
‫ﻣﱰ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .3‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﻋﲆ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺮﺑﻂ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺭﺟﻊ ﺇﱃ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .4‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﲆ ‪.Bluetooth‬‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ "‪."INQUIRY‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻨﻪ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻓﻘﻂ‬
‫ﻓﺴﻴﺠﺮﻱ ﺭﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‪ .‬ﺍﺭﺟﻊ ﺇﱃ ﺍﳋﻄﻮﺓ ‪.7‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫‪ .5‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻭﻓ ﹰﻘﺎ ﻟﻨﻮﻉ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﰲ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .6‬ﺍﺧﱰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﰲ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻠﻪ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪U u‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ‪) ~ ENTER‬ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ(‪.‬‬
‫‪ .7‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﴢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﴢ‪0000 :‬‬
‫‪ .8‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ‪) ~ ENTER‬ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ( ﻟﻠﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﻧﺠﺎﺡ ﺭﺑﻂ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﺍﳋﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ‪،‬‬
‫ﺗﴤﺀ ﺃﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﻭﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ "‪ ."BT SRC‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺳﺘﲈﻉ ﺇﱃ ﺍﳌﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﰲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﳐﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﲈﻋﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪) VOL‬ﻣﺴﺘﻮ￯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ(‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﳌﺆﺛﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺔ‬
‫)‪ (SOUND EFFECT‬ﻭﻣﺴﺘﻮ￯ ﺍﻟﺴﲈﻋﺔ )‪SPEAKER‬‬
‫‪ (LEVEL‬ﰲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‪.‬‬
‫‪3:27:47‬‬
‫‪2010-04-26‬‬
‫‪HT905TAW-AL_DARELLK_ARA_9712.indd 40‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻊ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪ .AVRCP‬ﳌﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﺭﺟﻊ‬
‫ﺇﱃ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ‪.‬‬
‫‪41‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ‬
‫• ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻻ ﺗﺪﻋﻢ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺳﲈﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺱ ﺍﻷﺣﺎﺩﻳﺔ‬
‫)ﻣﻠﻒ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺳﲈﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺱ(‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﻳﻨﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻮﺟﺎﺕ ﺇﻟﻴﻜﱰﻭﻧﻴﺔ ﺃﺧﺮ￯‬
‫ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ‬
‫ﻭﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻷﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ‪ .‬ﻭﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﱃ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﲣﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﻠﻴﺔ ﻭﻓ ﹰﻘﺎ‬
‫ﳉﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﺍﳌﻮﺻﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﻋﻨﻪ‬
‫• ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﰲ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ ﳏﺪﻭﺩﺓ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ‬
‫ﻟﻜﻞ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﻭﻻ ﺗﺪﻋﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﺘﻌﺪﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺣﺘﻰ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺑﲔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﺍﳋﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ ﻭﺍﳉﻬﺎﺯ‬
‫ﺃﻗﻞ ﻣﻦ ‪ 10‬ﻣﱰ‪ ،‬ﻟﻜﻦ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﻋﻮﺍﺋﻖ ﺑﲔ ﺍﳉﻬﺎﺯﻳﻦ‪ ،‬ﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ ﻻ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﲔ ﺍﳉﻬﺎﺯﻳﻦ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ‪ ،‬ﺣﺴﺐ ﻃﺮﺍﺯ ﺍﳉﻬﺎﺯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺮﺑﻂ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ‪) Bluetooth‬ﺍﻟﺒﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ( ﻟﻠﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﻋﻨﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﹸﻌﺮﺽ ﰲ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﰲ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻭﰲ ﺣﺎﻝ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺇﲤﺎﻡ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ‪ ،‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ "‪"BT READY‬‬
‫ﻋﲆ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﻨﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﰲ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﻋﻄﻞ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻲ ﻧﺎﺗﺞ ﻋﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻟﻨﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﱰﺩﺩ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ‬
‫ﺍﳌﻴﻜﺮﻭﻭﻳﻒ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ‪ LAN‬ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻛﲈ ﺳﻴﻨﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﰲ ﺣﺎﻝ ﻭﻗﻮﻑ ﺃﻱ ﺷﺨﺺ ﻛﻌﺎﺋﻖ‬
‫ﻟﻼﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﲔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﻭﺍﳌﺸﻐﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ‬
‫ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﲑ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻓﺼﻞ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ‪،‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ‪ Bluetooth‬ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮ￯‪.‬‬
‫)ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ‪ y‬ﺍﻟﺒﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﺑﺨﻼﻑ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ(‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ‪BT CONN :‬‬
‫ﻓﺼﻞ‪DISCONN :‬‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺘﺎﻉ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﳍﺎﺗﻒ ﻭﻣﺸﻐﻞ‬
‫‪ MP3‬ﻭﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﳌﻔﻜﺮﺓ ﻭﺳﲈﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺱ‪...‬ﺇﻟﺦ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺰﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺑﲔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﺴﻮﻑ‬
‫ﺗﻘﻞ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻓﺄﻛﺜﺮ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﻨﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺇﺫﺍ‬
‫ﺃﺻﺒﺤﺖ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺑﲔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺃﻛﱪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﲇ ﻟﻠﺒﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻨﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﳉﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﳛﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﲆ ﺗﻜﻨﻮﻟﻮﺟﻴﺎ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺫﺍ‬
‫ﺃﺑﻌﺪﺕ ﺍﳉﻬﺎﺯ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻷﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ‪ 10‬ﻣﱰ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﺍﳌﻮﺻﻞ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺮﺑﻂ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﲆ ‪INFO/DISPLAY‬‬
‫ﺗﺘﻐﲑ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﻋﲆ ﺍﻟﻨﺤﻮ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﱄ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺘﻜﺮﺍﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﺍﳌﺤﲇ ‪ T‬ﻭﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﳉﻬﺎﺯ ‪ T‬ﻭﺑﺪﻭﻥ‬
‫‪... T‬‬
‫‪3:27:47‬‬
‫‪2010-04-26‬‬
‫‪HT905TAW-AL_DARELLK_ARA_9712.indd 41‬‬
‫‪42‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻴﺎﻧﺔ‬
‫‪5‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻴﺎﻧﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻠﺤﻮﻇﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ‬
‫ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻠﺼﻖ ﺃﻱ ﻭﺭﻗﺔ ﺃﻭ ﴍﻳﻂ ﻋﲆ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻴﺎﻧﺔ‬
‫‪5‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﰲ ﺍﳊﺎﻓﻈﺔ‪ .‬ﻻ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﻟﻀﻮﺀ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺲ ﺍﳌﺒﺎﴍ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺼﺎﺩﺭ ﺍﳊﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﻭﻻ ﺗﱰﻛﻪ ﰲ ﺳﻴﺎﺭﺓ ﻣﺘﻮﻗﻔﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻀﻮﺀ ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺲ ﺍﳌﺒﺎﴍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ‬
‫ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻔﺎﻅ ﺑﺼﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﺍﻷﺻﲇ ﻭﻣﻮﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﻐﻠﻴﻒ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ‬
‫ﺭﻏﺒﺖ ﰲ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‪ ،‬ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﺘﻊ ﺑﺄﻗﴡ ﻗﺪﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳊﲈﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻋﺪ‬
‫ﺗﻐﻠﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻛﲈ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻣﻐﻠﻔﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻗﺪﻭﻣﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺼﻨﻊ ﻷﻭﻝ ﻣﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺎﻓﻆ ﻋﲆ ﻧﻈﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﻄﺢ ﺍﳋﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺳﻮﺍﺋﻞ ﻃﻴﺎﺭﺓ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺭﺷﺎﺵ ﺍﳌﺒﻴﺪ ﺍﳊﴩﻱ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺮﺏ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﳌﺴﺢ ﻣﻊ ﺷﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﰲ ﺗﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﺢ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﱰﻙ ﻣﻨﺘﺠﺎﺕ ﻣﻄﺎﻃﻴﺔ ﺃﻭﺑﻼﺳﺘﻴﻜﻴﺔ ﺗﻼﺻﻖ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻟﻔﱰﺓ‬
‫ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻦ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‬
‫ﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﳌﺸﻐﹼ ﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻗﻄﻌﺔ ﻗﲈﺷﻴﺔ ﻧﺎﻋﻤﺔ ﻭﺟﺎﻓﺔ‪ .‬ﺇﻥ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺳﻄﺢ ﻣﺘﺴﺨﺔ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻗﻄﻌﺔ ﻗﲈﺷﻴﺔ ﻧﺎﻋﻤﺔ ﻣﺒﻠﻠﺔ‬
‫ﺑﻤﺤﻠﻮﻝ ﻣﻨﻈﻒ ﻣﻌﺘﺪﻝ‪ .‬ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻮﺍﺩ ﻣﺬﻳﺒﺔ ﻗﻮﻳﺔ ﻣﺜﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺤﻮﻝ ﻭﺍﻟﺒﻨﺰﻳﻦ ﻭﻣﺮﻗﻖ ﺍﻟﺪﻫﺎﻥ‪ ،‬ﻷﻥ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﰲ ﺗﻠﻒ‬
‫ﺳﻄﺢ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺻﻴﺎﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻮﺍﺩ ﻣﺬﻳﺒﺔ ﻗﻮﻳﺔ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺤﻮﻝ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺒﻨﺰﻳﻦ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﺮﻗﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻫﺎﻥ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﳌﻨﻈﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﰲ ﺍﻷﺳﻮﺍﻕ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻣﻮﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺮﺵ ﺍﳌﻀﺎﺩﺓ‬
‫ﻟﻠﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻛﻨﺔ ﺍﳌﺨﺼﺼﺔ ﰲ ﴍﺍﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺳﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﻳﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪3:27:47‬‬
‫‪2010-04-26‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺫﺍ ﺗﻘﻨﻴﺔ ﻭﺩﻗﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺗﺴﺎﺥ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻴﺔ ﻭﺃﺟﺰﺍﺀ ﳏﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻠﻔﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺗﻀﻌﻒ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﳌﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺄﻗﺮﺏ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻌﺘﻤﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪HT905TAW-AL_DARELLK_ARA_9712.indd 42‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻜﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﳌﺸﻜﻼﺕ ﻭﺇﺻﻼﺣﻬﺎ‬
‫‪43‬‬
‫‪6‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻜﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﳌﺸﻜﻼﺕ ﻭﺇﺻﻼﺣﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻜﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻷﺧﻄﺎﺀ ﻭﺇﺻﻼﺣﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﺒﺐ‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﰎ ﻓﺼﻞ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻌﺪ ﻻﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﻗﺮﺹ ‪.DVD‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﳌﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺴﺘﻘﺒﻠﻬﺎ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ‪ DVD‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﺎﺑﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻮﺻﻠﺔ ﺑﺈﺣﻜﺎﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﺑﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺑﺈﺣﻜﺎﻡ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ‬
‫ﻭﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ‪.DVD‬‬
‫ﺍﳉﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﳌﺘﺼﻞ ﺑﻜﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻌﺪ ﻻﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ﺧﺮﺝ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ‬
‫‪.DVD‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﳉﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺣﺘﻰ‬
‫ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺳﻤﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ‪. DVD‬‬
‫ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﺑﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﲟﻜﺒﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺤﻜﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﺑﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻨﺎﻓﺬ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻓﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﺎﺑﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺗﺎﻟﻔﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﻟﻪ ﺑﻜﺎﺑﻞ ﺻﻮﺗﻲ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﻣﺘﺴﺦ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﻄﻌﺔ ﻗﻤﺎﺵ ﻧﺎﻋﻤﺔ ﻣﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻙ ﺑﻘﻄﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻤﺎﺵ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﳋﺎﺭﺝ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺿﻌﻴﻒ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺑﺎﳌﺮﺓ‬
‫ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ‪DVD‬‬
‫ﺭﺩﻳﺌﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻗﺮﺹ‬
‫‪DVD/CD‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﺬﺭ ﺗﻮﻟﻴﻒ ﻣﺤﻄﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺩﻳﻮ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﻜﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﻻ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﻜﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ ‪ /‬ﻻ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ‬
‫ﺑﺎﳌﺮﺓ‬
‫‪2010-04-26‬‬
‫ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺃﻱ ﻗﺮﺹ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‪.‬‬
‫ﰎ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻗﺮﺹ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻟﻠﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻗﺮﺹ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻟﻠﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ )ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﻭﻧﻈﺎﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﻭﻛﻮﺩ ﺍﳌﻨﻄﻘﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫ﰎ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺑﺎﳌﻘﻠﻮﺏ‪.‬‬
‫ﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻮﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﳌﻠﺼﻖ ﺃﻭ ﺍﳉﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﳌﻄﺒﻮﻉ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ‬
‫ﻷﻋﻠﻰ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﻗﻔﻞ ﻋﺎﺋﻠﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﳝﻨﻊ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ‪ DVD‬ﺫﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺗﺼﻨﻴﻒ ﻣﻌﲔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﺮﻭﺭ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ ﺃﻭ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻨﻴﻒ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﻣﺘﺴﺦ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﻄﻌﺔ ﻗﻤﺎﺵ ﻧﺎﻋﻤﺔ ﻣﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻙ ﺑﻘﻄﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻤﺎﺵ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﳋﺎﺭﺝ‪.‬‬
‫ﰎ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ‪ DVD/CD‬ﻗﺮﻳ ﹰﺒﺎ ﺟ ﹰﺪﺍ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ ﳑﺎ‬
‫ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻘﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ‪ DVD‬ﻭﺍﳌﻜﻮﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺃﺑﻌﺪ ﻋﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ‪.‬‬
‫ﰎ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺋﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻠﻪ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻓﺤﺺ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺋﻲ ﻭﺍﺿﺒﻄﻪ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻮﺿﻌﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻫﻮﺍﺋﻲ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﺰﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻮﺓ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﻣﺤﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺩﻳﻮ ﺿﻌﻴﻔﺔ ﺟ ﹰﺪﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﻟﻴﻒ ﺍﶈﻄﺔ ﻳﺪﻭﻳﹰﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺃﻳﺔ ﻗﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺎ ﺃﻭ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﳌﻀﺒﻮﻃﺔ ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺎ‪.‬‬
‫)ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻟﻴﻒ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﻣﺴﺢ ﻗﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﳌﺴﺒﻖ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﳌﺴﺒﻖ ﻟﺒﻌﺾ ﻣﺤﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺩﻳﻮ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ‬
‫‪ 36‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻮﺟﻪ ﻧﺤﻮ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺑﻌﻴﺪ ﺟﺪﺍ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺪﻭﺩ ‪ 23‬ﻗﺪﻡ )‪ 7‬ﻣﺘﺮ(‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ‪.DVD‬‬
‫ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﺣﺎﺋﻞ ﺑﲔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﻩ‪0‬ﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺋﻖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻓﺎﺭﻏﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺑﺄﺧﺮﻯ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪6‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻜﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﳌﺸﻜﻼﺕ ﻭﺇﺻﻼﺣﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺳﻤﺎﻉ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻫﻤﻬﻤﺔ‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻗﺮﺹ‬
‫‪ DVD‬ﺃﻭ ‪CD‬‬
‫‪3:27:47‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻼﺝ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﲟﺄﺧﺬ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺑﺎﳊﺎﺋﻂ ﺑﺄﻣﺎﻥ‪.‬‬
‫‪HT905TAW-AL_DARELLK_ARA_9712.indd 43‬‬
‫‪44‬‬
‫ﻣﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫‪7‬‬
‫ﻣﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺭﻣﻮﺯ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻟﻐﺘﻚ ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ ﻟﻺﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪) Disc Audio :‬ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ( ﻭ‪) Disc Subtitle‬ﺗﺮﲨﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ( ﻭ‪) Disc Menu‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ(‪.‬‬
‫‪7‬‬
‫‪3:27:48‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﻨﻐﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻮﻓﺎﻛﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻮﻓﻴﻨﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺳﺒﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﻮﺩﺍﻧﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﻮﺍﺣﻴﻠﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﻮﻳﺪﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺟﺎﻟﻮﺝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺟﻴﻜﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻣﻴﻠﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻴﻠﻮﺟﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻳﻼﻧﺪﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻧﺠﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﱰﻛﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﱰﻛﲈﻧﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻭﻛﺮﺍﻧﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻭﺭﺩﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻭﺯﺑﻜﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺘﻨﺎﻣﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻮﻻﺑﻴﻜﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻳﻠﺰﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻟﻮﻓﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺇﻛﺴﻮﺯﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻳﺸﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻴﻮﺭﻭﺑﺎ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻟﻮ‬
‫‪2010-04-26‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬
‫‪8373‬‬
‫‪8375‬‬
‫‪8376‬‬
‫‪6983‬‬
‫‪8385‬‬
‫‪8387‬‬
‫‪8386‬‬
‫‪8476‬‬
‫‪8471‬‬
‫‪8465‬‬
‫‪8469‬‬
‫‪8472‬‬
‫‪8479‬‬
‫‪8482‬‬
‫‪8475‬‬
‫‪8487‬‬
‫‪8575‬‬
‫‪8582‬‬
‫‪8590‬‬
‫‪8673‬‬
‫‪8679‬‬
‫‪6789‬‬
‫‪8779‬‬
‫‪8872‬‬
‫‪7473‬‬
‫‪8979‬‬
‫‪9085‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﳌﻘﺪﻭﻧﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻣﺎﻻﺟﺎﺱ‬
‫ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺰﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻣﺎﻻﻳﺎﻻﻡ‬
‫ﺍﳌﺎﻭﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﳌﺎﺭﺍﺛﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﳌﺎﻟﺪﻭﻓﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﳌﺎﻧﻐﻮﻟﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻧﺎﻭﺭﻭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻴﺒﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﺮﻭﳚﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻭﺭﻳﺎ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻨﺠﺎﺑﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺷﺘﻮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺭﺳﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻮﻟﻨﺪﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﱪﺗﻐﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻛﻮﻳﺘﺸﻮﺍ‬
‫ﺭﺍﻳﺘﻮ ﺭﻭﻣﺎﻧﻴﻚ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻭﻣﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻭﺳﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻣﺴﻮﻳﻨﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴ‬
‫ﻨﻜﺮﻳﺘﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﹼ‬
‫ﹼ‬
‫ﺍﳉﻴﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﻜﺘﻠﻨﺪﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻝ ﴏﺑﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺮﻭﺍﺗﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﴫﺑﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺷﻮﻧﺎ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﻨﺪﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬
‫‪7684‬‬
‫‪7775‬‬
‫‪7771‬‬
‫‪7783‬‬
‫‪7776‬‬
‫‪7773‬‬
‫‪7782‬‬
‫‪7779‬‬
‫‪7778‬‬
‫‪7865‬‬
‫‪7869‬‬
‫‪7879‬‬
‫‪7982‬‬
‫‪8065‬‬
‫‪8083‬‬
‫‪7065‬‬
‫‪8076‬‬
‫‪8084‬‬
‫‪8185‬‬
‫‪8277‬‬
‫‪8279‬‬
‫‪8285‬‬
‫‪8377‬‬
‫‪8365‬‬
‫‪7168‬‬
‫‪8382‬‬
‫‪8372‬‬
‫‪8378‬‬
‫‪8368‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻧﺴﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻳﺰﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻏﺎﻟﻴﺸﻴﺎﻥ‬
‫ﺍﳉﻮﺭﺟﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﳌﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻴﻮ ﻧﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺟﺮﻳﻦ ﻻﻧﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻐﻮﺍﺭﺍﻧﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﳉﻮﺟﺎﺭﺍﺗﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﳍﺎﻭﺳﺎ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﱪﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﳍﻨﺪﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﳌﺠﺮﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻳﺴﻠﻨﺪﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﺪﻭﻧﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻟﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻳﺮﻟﻨﺪﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻳﻄﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻴﺎﺑﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻧﺎﺩﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺸﻤﲑﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺯﺍﺧﺎﺳﺘﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺮﻏﻴﺰﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﻮﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺮﺩﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻼﻭﺳﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻼﺗﻴﻨﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻼﺗﻔﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻴﻨﺠﺎﻻ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬
‫‪7082‬‬
‫‪7089‬‬
‫‪7176‬‬
‫‪7565‬‬
‫‪6869‬‬
‫‪6976‬‬
‫‪7576‬‬
‫‪7178‬‬
‫‪7185‬‬
‫‪7265‬‬
‫‪7387‬‬
‫‪7273‬‬
‫‪7285‬‬
‫‪7383‬‬
‫‪7378‬‬
‫‪7365‬‬
‫‪7165‬‬
‫‪7384‬‬
‫‪7465‬‬
‫‪7578‬‬
‫‪7583‬‬
‫‪7575‬‬
‫‪7589‬‬
‫‪7579‬‬
‫‪7585‬‬
‫‪7679‬‬
‫‪7665‬‬
‫‪7686‬‬
‫‪7678‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ‬
‫ﻓﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﺮﻳﻘﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻟﺒﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻣﻬﺮﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺭﻣﻴﻨﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺳﺎﻣﻴﺰ ﹼﻳﺔ‬
‫ﹼ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻳﲈﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺫﺭﺑﻴﺠﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺸﻜﲑﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺳﻜﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻐﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺑﻮﺗﺎﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻬﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﱪﻳﺘﻮﻧﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻠﻐﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻮﺭﻣﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻴﻼﺭﻭﺳﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻴﻨﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺮﻭﺍﺗﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻴﻜﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﺍﻧﲈﺭﻛﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﳍﻮﻟﻨﺪﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻧﺠﻠﻴﺰﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺇﺳﱪﺍﻧﺘﻮ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺳﺘﻮﻧﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺭﻭﺯﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻓﻴﺠﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻨﻠﻨﺪﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬
‫‪6565‬‬
‫‪6570‬‬
‫‪8381‬‬
‫‪6577‬‬
‫‪6582‬‬
‫‪7289‬‬
‫‪6583‬‬
‫‪6588‬‬
‫‪6590‬‬
‫‪6665‬‬
‫‪6985‬‬
‫‪6678‬‬
‫‪6890‬‬
‫‪6672‬‬
‫‪6682‬‬
‫‪6671‬‬
‫‪7789‬‬
‫‪6669‬‬
‫‪9072‬‬
‫‪7282‬‬
‫‪6783‬‬
‫‪6865‬‬
‫‪7876‬‬
‫‪6978‬‬
‫‪6979‬‬
‫‪6984‬‬
‫‪7079‬‬
‫‪7074‬‬
‫‪7073‬‬
‫‪HT905TAW-AL_DARELLK_ARA_9712.indd 44‬‬
‫ﻣﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫‪45‬‬
‫ﺭﻣﻮﺯ ﺍﳌﻨﻄﻘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﺧﱰ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺭﻣﻮﺯ ﺍﳌﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺭﺍﺟﻮﺍﻱ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻠﺒﲔ‬
‫ﺑﻮﻟﻨﺪﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﱪﺗﻐﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺭﻭﻣﺎﻧﻴﺎ‬
‫ﺭﻭﺳﻴﺎ ﺍﻻﲢﺎﺩﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﳌﻤﻠﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻌﻮﺩﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﻨﻐﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺳﻨﻐﺎﻓﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﲨﻬﻮﺭﻳﺔ ﺳﻠﻮﻓﺎﻛﻴﺎ‬
‫ﺳﻠﻮﻓﻴﻨﻴﺎ‬
‫ﺟﻨﻮﺏ ﺃﻓﺮﻳﻘﻴﺎ‬
‫ﻛﻮﺭﻳﺎ ﺍﳉﻨﻮﺑﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺒﺎﻧﻴﺎ‬
‫ﴎﻳﻼﻧﻜﺎ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﻮﻳﺪ‬
‫ﺳﻮﻳﴪﺍ‬
‫ﺗﺎﻳﻮﺍﻥ‬
‫ﺗﺎﻳﻼﻧﺪ‬
‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺎ‬
‫ﺃﻭﻏﻨﺪﺍ‬
‫ﺃﻭﻛﺮﺍﻧﻴﺎ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻻﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺘﺤﺪﺓ‬
‫ﺃﻭﺭﻭﺟﻮﺍﻱ‬
‫ﺃﻭﺯﺑﻜﺴﺘﺎﻥ‬
‫ﻓﻴﺘﻨﺎﻡ‬
‫ﺯﻳﻤﺒﺎﺑﻮﻱ‬
‫ﺍﳌﻨﻄﻘﺔ‬
‫‪PY‬‬
‫‪PH‬‬
‫‪PL‬‬
‫‪PT‬‬
‫‪RO‬‬
‫‪RU‬‬
‫‪SA‬‬
‫‪SN‬‬
‫‪SG‬‬
‫‪SK‬‬
‫‪SI‬‬
‫‪ZA‬‬
‫‪KR‬‬
‫‪ES‬‬
‫‪LK‬‬
‫‪SE‬‬
‫‪CH‬‬
‫‪TW‬‬
‫‪TH‬‬
‫‪TR‬‬
‫‪UG‬‬
‫‪UA‬‬
‫‪US‬‬
‫‪UY‬‬
‫‪UZ‬‬
‫‪VN‬‬
‫‪ZW‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬
‫ﺟﺮﻳﻦ ﻻﻧﺪ‬
‫ﻫﻮﻧﺞ ﻛﻮﻧﺞ‬
‫ﺍﳌﺠﺮ‬
‫ﺍﳍﻨﺪ‬
‫ﺇﻧﺪﻭﻧﻴﺴﻴﺎ‬
‫ﺇﴎﺍﺋﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺇﻳﻄﺎﻟﻴﺎ‬
‫ﺟﺎﻣﺎﻳﻜﺎ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻴﺎﺑﺎﻥ‬
‫ﻛﻴﻨﻴﺎ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﻮﻳﺖ‬
‫ﻟﻴﺒﻴﺎ‬
‫ﻟﻮﻛﺴﻤﺒﻮﺭﺝ‬
‫ﻣﺎﻟﻴﺰﻳﺎ‬
‫ﺍﳌﺎﻟﺪﻳﻒ‬
‫ﺍﳌﻜﺴﻴﻚ‬
‫ﻣﻮﻧﺎﻛﻮ‬
‫ﻣﻨﻐﻮﻟﻴﺎ‬
‫ﺍﳌﻐﺮﺏ‬
‫ﻧﻴﺒﺎﻝ‬
‫ﻫﻮﻟﻨﺪﺍ‬
‫ﺟﺰﺭ ﺍﻷﻧﺘﻴﻞ ﺍﳍﻮﻟﻨﺪﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻧﻴﻮﺯﻳﻼﻧﺪﺍ‬
‫ﻧﻴﺠﲑﻳﺎ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﺮﻭﻳﺞ‬
‫ﻋﲈﻥ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻛﺴﺘﺎﻥ‬
‫ﺑﻨﲈ‬
‫ﺍﳌﻨﻄﻘﺔ‬
‫‪GL‬‬
‫‪HK‬‬
‫‪HU‬‬
‫‪IN‬‬
‫‪ID‬‬
‫‪IL‬‬
‫‪IT‬‬
‫‪JM‬‬
‫‪JP‬‬
‫‪KE‬‬
‫‪KW‬‬
‫‪LY‬‬
‫‪LU‬‬
‫‪MY‬‬
‫‪MV‬‬
‫‪MX‬‬
‫‪MC‬‬
‫‪MN‬‬
‫‪MA‬‬
‫‪NP‬‬
‫‪NL‬‬
‫‪AN‬‬
‫‪NZ‬‬
‫‪NG‬‬
‫‪NO‬‬
‫‪OM‬‬
‫‪PK‬‬
‫‪PA‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬
‫ﺃﻓﻐﺎﻧﺴﺘﺎﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺭﺟﻨﺘﲔ‬
‫ﺃﺳﱰﺍﻟﻴﺎ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﺴﺎ‬
‫ﺑﻠﺠﻴﻜﺎ‬
‫ﺑﻮﺗﺎﻥ‬
‫ﹸﺑﻮﻟﹺﻴﻔﻴﺎ‬
‫ﺍﻟﱪﺍﺯﻳﻞ‬
‫ﻛﻤﺒﻮﺩﻳﺎ‬
‫ﻛﻨﺪﺍ‬
‫ﺷﻴﲇ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﲔ‬
‫ﻛﻮﻟﻮﻣﺒﻴﺎ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﻮﻧﻐﻮ‬
‫ﻛﻮﺳﺘﺎﺭﻳﻜﺎ‬
‫ﻛﺮﻭﺍﺗﻴﺎ‬
‫ﲨﻬﻮﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻴﻚ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﺍﻧﲈﺭﻙ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻛﻮﺍﺩﻭﺭ‬
‫ﻣﴫ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻔﺎﺩﻭﺭ‬
‫ﺃﺛﻴﻮﺑﻴﺎ‬
‫ﻓﻴﺠﻲ‬
‫ﻓﻨﻠﻨﺪﺍ‬
‫ﻓﺮﻧﺴﺎ‬
‫ﺃﳌﺎﻧﻴﺎ‬
‫ﺑﺮﻳﻄﺎﻧﻴﺎ ﺍﻟﻌﻈﻤﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻧﺎﻥ‬
‫ﺍﳌﻨﻄﻘﺔ‬
‫‪AF‬‬
‫‪AR‬‬
‫‪AU‬‬
‫‪AT‬‬
‫‪BE‬‬
‫‪BT‬‬
‫‪BO‬‬
‫‪BR‬‬
‫‪KH‬‬
‫‪CA‬‬
‫‪CL‬‬
‫‪CN‬‬
‫‪CO‬‬
‫‪CG‬‬
‫‪CR‬‬
‫‪HR‬‬
‫‪CZ‬‬
‫‪DK‬‬
‫‪EC‬‬
‫‪EG‬‬
‫‪SV‬‬
‫‪ET‬‬
‫‪FJ‬‬
‫‪FI‬‬
‫‪FR‬‬
‫‪DE‬‬
‫‪GB‬‬
‫‪GR‬‬
‫‪7‬‬
‫‪3:27:48‬‬
‫‪2010-04-26‬‬
‫‪HT905TAW-AL_DARELLK_ARA_9712.indd 45‬‬
‫‪46‬‬
‫ﻣﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﱰﺍﺧﻴﺺ‬
‫ﺗﻢ ﺗﺼﻨﻴﻊ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺑﻤﻮﺟﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺧﻴﺺ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻨﻮﺡ ﻣﻦ‬
‫‪ .Dolby Laboratories‬ﻭﺗﻌﺘﺒﺮ ﺭﻣﻮﺯ ‪ Dolby‬ﻭ‪dou-‬‬
‫‪ ble-D‬ﻛﻠﻬﺎ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻟـ ‪.Dolby Laboratories‬‬
‫ﻣﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺗﻢ ﺗﺼﻨﻴﻌﻪ ﺑﻤﻮﺟﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺧﻴﺺ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻨﻮﺡ ﺑﻤﻮﺟﺐ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﺀﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺮﺍﻉ ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ‪;5،956،674 ;5،451،942 :‬‬
‫‪ 6،487،535 ;5،978،762 ;5،974،380‬ﻭﻏﻴﺮﻫﺎ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﺀﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺮﺍﻉ ﺍﻷﻣﺮﻳﻜﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﺩﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺗﻌﺘﺒﺮ ‪ DTS‬ﻭ ‪ DTS Digital Surround‬ﻛﻠﻬﺎ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺷﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻭﺭﻣﻮﺯ ‪ DTS‬ﻫﻲ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻤﺆﺳﺴﺔ ‪ ،© .DTS، Inc‬ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺤﻘﻮﻕ ﻣﺤﻔﻮﻇﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻤﺆﺳﺴﺔ ‪.DTS، Inc 1996-2008‬‬
‫‪7‬‬
‫‪ ،HDMI‬ﻭﺷﻌﺎﺭ ‪ ،HDMI‬ﻭ‪High-Definition‬‬
‫‪ ،Multimedia Interface‬ﻫﻲ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺆﻭﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺼﺔ ﺑﻤﻨﺢ ﺗﺮﺍﺧﻴﺺ ‪.HDMI‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ )ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻬﻼﻙ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﺾ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ(‬
‫ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻣﻨﺘﺠﺎﺕ ‪ LG‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﻣﺒﺘﻜﺮ ﹸﻣﺪﻣﺞ ﻻﺳﺘﻬﻼﻙ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﺪﺍﺩ‪ .‬ﻭﻫﻮ ﻳﺴﺘﻬﻠﻚ ﺃﻗﻞ ﻣﻦ ‪0.09‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻫﻜﺬﺍ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﻬﻼﻙ ﻛﻤﻴﺎﺕ ﻗﻠﻴﻠﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺀ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻣﻊ‬
‫ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻜﻨﻮﻟﻮﺟﻴﺎ ‪ ®Bluetooth‬ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﻫﻲ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﻳﺴﻤﺢ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻹﻟﻴﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ‪10‬‬
‫ﻣﺘﺮ ﻛﺤﺪ ﺃﻗﺼﻰ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻔﺮﺽ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺗﻮﺻﻞ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺩﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ‬
‫ﺗﻜﻨﻮﻟﻮﺟﻴﺎ ‪ ®Bluetooth‬ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﺃﻱ ﻣﺼﺎﺭﻳﻒ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻭﺩ ﺑﺘﻜﻨﻮﻟﻮﺟﻴﺎ‬
‫‪ ®Bluetooth‬ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﻜﻨﻮﻟﻮﺟﻴﺎ ‪ ®Bluetooth‬ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﻭﺷﻌﺎﺭﺍﺕ ‪ ®Bluetooth‬ﻫﻲ ﻣﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ‬
‫‪ .Bluetooth® SIG،Inc‬ﻭﺃﻱ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻟﻬﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻗﺒﻞ ‪ LG‬ﻟﻺﻟﻴﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﺎﺕ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺑﻤﻮﺟﺐ ﺗﺮﺧﻴﺺ‪ .‬ﻛﻤﺎ‬
‫ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻷﺧﺮ￯ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ‬
‫ﺑﻤﺎﻟﻜﻴﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻨﻴﻴﻦ‪.‬‬
‫””‪ “DVD Logo‬ﻫﻮ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﻤﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﻣﻨﺢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺧﻴﺺ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻨﺴﻖ‪/‬ﺷﻌﺎﺭ ‪.DVD‬‬
‫‪ ®DivX‬ﻫﻲ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻟﻤﺆﺳﺴﺔ ‪ ،DivX‬ﻭﻻ‬
‫ﻳﺠﻮﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﺇﻻ ﺑﻤﻮﺟﺐ ﺗﺮﺧﻴﺺ‪.‬‬
‫‪3:27:48‬‬
‫‪2010-04-26‬‬
‫‪HT905TAW-AL_DARELLK_ARA_9712.indd 46‬‬
‫ﻣﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫‪47‬‬
‫ﺍﳌﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻣﺎ ﻫﻲ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ‪SIMPLINK‬؟‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﰲ ﺑﻌﺾ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ‪LG‬‬
‫ﺍﳌﺰﻭﺩ ﺑﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ‪ SIMPLINK‬ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻭﺻﻠﺔ ‪.HDMI‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﰲ ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ‪ LG‬ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻋﲆ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﺍﳌﺆﻗﺖ ﻭﺍﳌﺴﺢ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﻭﺯ ﻭﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻭﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﻏﲑ‬
‫ﺫﻟﻚ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﻣﺎﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﲆ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﳌﺘﻌﻠﻘﺔ ﺑﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ‪.SIMPLINK‬‬
‫• ﻳﺘﻤﻴﺰ ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ‪ LG‬ﺍﳌﺰﻭﺩ ﺑﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ‪SIMPLINK‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﺸﻌﺎﺭ ﺍﳌﻮﺿﺢ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺃﻋﲆ ﻣﻦ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ HDMI‬ﺷﺪﺓ ‪1.2‬‬
‫ﺃﻣﺒﲑ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﺎﻡ‬
‫• ﻣﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎﺕ ﻣﺘﻌﻠﻘﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﺭﺟﻊ ﺇﱃ ﺍﳌﻠﺼﻖ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﴘ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﺳﺘﻬﻼﻙ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﺭﺟﻊ ﺇﱃ ﺍﳌﻠﺼﻖ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﴘ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ )ﻋﺮﺽ × ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ × ﻋﻤﻖ(‪:‬‬
‫‪ 281 x 62.5 x 430‬ﻣﻢ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫• ﺍﻟﻮﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﰲ )ﺗﻘﺮﻳ ﹰﺒﺎ(‪:‬‬
‫‪kg 4.0‬‬
‫• ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻲ‪:‬‬
‫‪ 14‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻓﻬﺮﳖﻴﺖ ﺇﱃ ‪ 95‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻓﻬﺮﳖﻴﺖ )‪ 5‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ ﺇﱃ‬
‫‪ 35‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ(‬
‫• ﺍﻟﺮﻃﻮﺑﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪:‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ‪ 5%‬ﺇﱃ ‪.90%‬‬
‫• ﻣﺼﺪ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ )‪:(USB‬‬
‫‪500 mA‬‬
‫‪DC 5 V‬‬
‫ﺍﳌﺨﺎﺭﺝ‪/‬ﺍﳌﺪﺍﺧﻞ‬
‫• ﳐﺮﺝ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪:‬‬
‫)‪ 75 ،1.0 V (p-p‬ﺃﻭﻡ‪ ،‬ﺗﺰﺍﻣﻦ ﺳﻠﺒﻲ‪ ،‬ﻣﻘﺒﺲ ‪RCA jack x 1‬‬
‫ﺍﳌﻜﻮﻥ‪:‬‬
‫• ﳐﺮﺝ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﹼ‬
‫)‪ 75 ،(Y) 1.0 V (p-p‬ﺃﻭﻡ‪ ،‬ﺗﺰﺍﻣﻦ ﺳﻠﺒﻲ‪،‬‬
‫ﻣﻘﺒﺲ ‪ 75 ،(Pb)/(Pr) 0.7 V (p-p) RCA jack x 1‬ﺃﻭﻡ‪،‬‬
‫ﻣﻘﺒﺲ ‪RCA jack x 2‬‬
‫• ﻣﺪﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺎﻇﺮﻱ‪:‬‬
‫)‪2.0 Vrms (1 kHz،0 dB‬‬
‫‪ 600،‬ﺃﻭﻡ‪RCA jack (L،R) x 1،‬‬
‫• ﻣﺪﺧﻞ ﺭﻗﻤﻲ )ﺑﴫﻱ(‪:‬‬
‫)‪Optical jack x 1 ،3 V (p-p‬‬
‫ﻣﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫• ‪) HDMI OUT‬ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪/‬ﺻﻮﺕ(‪:‬‬
‫‪ 19‬ﺳﻨﹰﺎ )‪ HDMI‬ﻗﻴﺎﳼ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ﺃ(‬
‫‪HDMI version : 1.2A‬‬
‫‪7‬‬
‫• ﻣﻨﻔﺬ ﺩﺧﻮﻝ‪:‬‬
‫‪) 0.5 Vrms‬ﻣﻘﺒﺲ ﺑﴫﻱ ‪ 3.5‬ﻣﻢ(‬
‫ﻣﻮﺍﻟﻒ‬
‫• ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺗﻮﻟﻴﻒ ‪:FM‬‬
‫‪ 87.5‬ﺇﱃ ‪ 108.0‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎ ﻫﺮﺗﺰ ﺃﻭ ‪ 87.50‬ﺇﱃ ‪ 108.00‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎ ﻫﺮﺗﺰ‬
‫• ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺗﻮﻟﻴﻒ ‪:AM‬‬
‫‪ 522‬ﺇﱃ ‪ 1 620‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﻫﺮﺗﺰ‪ 520 ،‬ﺇﱃ ‪ 1 710‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﻫﺮﺗﺰ ﺃﻭ‬
‫‪ 522‬ﺇﱃ ‪ 1 710‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﻫﺮﺗﺰ‬
‫‪3:27:49‬‬
‫‪2010-04-26‬‬
‫‪HT905TAW-AL_DARELLK_ARA_9712.indd 47‬‬
‫‪48‬‬
‫ﻣﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﳌﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ‬
‫• ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻻﺳﱰﻱ‪:‬‬
‫• ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺴﻴﻢ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﳌﻘﺪﻣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﳌﺮﻛﺰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺴﻴﻢ‬
‫ﻣﻀﺨﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
‫‪ 180‬ﻭﺍﺕ ‪ 180 +‬ﻭﺍﺕ‬
‫)‪ 4‬ﺃﻭﻡ ﻋﻨﺪ ‪ 1‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﻫﲑﺗﺰ(‬
‫‪ 180‬ﻭﺍﺕ ‪ 180 +‬ﻭﺍﺕ‬
‫)‪ 4‬ﺃﻭﻡ ﻋﻨﺪ ‪ 1‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﻫﲑﺗﺰ(‬
‫‪ 180‬ﻭﺍﺕ )‪ 4‬ﺃﻭﻡ ﻋﻨﺪ ‪ 1‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﻫﲑﺗﺰ(‬
‫‪ 180‬ﻭﺍﺕ ‪ 180 +‬ﻭﺍﺕ‬
‫)‪ 4‬ﺃﻭﻡ ﻋﻨﺪ ‪ 1‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﻫﲑﺗﺰ(‬
‫‪ 200‬ﻭﺍﺕ )‪ 3‬ﺃﻭﻡ ﻋﻨﺪ ‪ 60‬ﻫﺮﺗﺰ(‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻘﺒﻞ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎﺕ ﻣﺘﻌﻠﻘﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﱃ ﺍﳌﻠﺼﻖ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﴘ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻬﻼﻙ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻕ‪:‬‬
‫ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﱃ ﺍﳌﻠﺼﻖ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﴘ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺍﳋﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ )ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ×ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ×ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻝ(‬
‫‪ 9.9×8.6×2.5‬ﺑﻮﺻﺔ‬
‫)‪ 252.3×213.6×64‬ﻣﻢ (‬
‫ﺻﺎﰲ ﺍﻟﻮﺯﻥ‪:‬‬
‫‪ 2.6‬ﺭﻃﻞ )‪ 1.2‬ﻛﺠﻢ(‬
‫ﻣﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﳐﺮﺝ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ‪:‬‬
‫‪ 5.8‬ﻏﻴﻐﺎ ﻫﺮﺗﺰ‬
‫ﻣﻜﺒﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
‫• ﻣﻜﱪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﳌﻘﺎﻭﻣﺔ ‪:‬‬
‫ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﳌﻘﺪﺭﺓ‪:‬‬
‫ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﺼﻮ￯‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﻓﻴﺔ‬
‫)ﻋﺮﺽ × ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ × ﻋﻤﻖ(‪:‬‬
‫ﺻﺎﰲ ﺍﻟﻮﺯﻥ‪:‬‬
‫• ﻣﻜﱪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﳋﻠﻒ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﳌﻘﺎﻭﻣﺔ ‪:‬‬
‫ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﳌﻘﺪﺭﺓ‪:‬‬
‫ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﺼﻮ￯‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﻓﻴﺔ‬
‫)ﻋﺮﺽ × ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ × ﻋﻤﻖ(‪:‬‬
‫ﺻﺎﰲ ﺍﻟﻮﺯﻥ‪:‬‬
‫• ﻣﻜﱪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻷﻭﺳﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﳌﻘﺎﻭﻣﺔ ‪:‬‬
‫ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﳌﻘﺪﺭﺓ‪:‬‬
‫ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﺼﻮ￯‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﻓﻴﺔ‬
‫)ﻋﺮﺽ × ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ × ﻋﻤﻖ(‪:‬‬
‫ﺻﺎﰲ ﺍﻟﻮﺯﻥ‪:‬‬
‫• ﻓﺮﻋﻲ ﺳﻠﺒﻲ ﻣﻜﱪ ﺻﻮﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﳌﻘﺎﻭﻣﺔ ‪:‬‬
‫ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﳌﻘﺪﺭﺓ‪:‬‬
‫ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﺼﻮ￯‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﻓﻴﺔ‬
‫)ﻋﺮﺽ × ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ × ﻋﻤﻖ(‪:‬‬
‫ﺻﺎﰲ ﺍﻟﻮﺯﻥ‪:‬‬
‫‪ 2‬ﻣﻜﱪ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻻﲡﺎﻩ‬
‫‪ 4‬ﺃﻭﻡ‬
‫‪ 180‬ﻭﺍﺕ‬
‫‪ 360‬ﻭﺍﺕ‬
‫‪290 x 1 150 x 290‬ﻣﻢ‬
‫‪ 3.1‬ﻛﺠﻢ‬
‫‪ 2‬ﻣﻜﱪ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺛﻨﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻻﲡﺎﻩ‬
‫‪ 4‬ﺃﻭﻡ‬
‫‪ 180‬ﻭﺍﺕ‬
‫‪ 360‬ﻭﺍﺕ‬
‫‪290 x 1 150 x 290‬ﻣﻢ‬
‫‪ 3.0‬ﻛﺠﻢ‬
‫‪ 2‬ﻣﻜﱪ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻻﲡﺎﻩ‬
‫‪ 4‬ﺃﻭﻡ‬
‫‪ 180‬ﻭﺍﺕ‬
‫‪ 360‬ﻭﺍﺕ‬
‫‪85 x 105 x 350‬ﻣﻢ‬
‫‪ .10‬ﻛﺠﻢ‬
‫ﻣﻜﱪ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻻﲡﺎﻩ‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺃﻭﻡ‬
‫‪ 200‬ﻭﺍﺕ‬
‫‪ 400‬ﻭﺍﺕ‬
‫‪318 x 385 x 190‬ﻣﻢ‬
‫‪ 5.0‬ﻛﺠﻢ‬
‫ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻤﻴﲈﺕ ﻭﺍﳌﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﻋﺮﺿﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻐﻴﲑ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺇﺷﻌﺎﺭ ﻣﺴﺒﻖ‪.‬‬
‫‪7‬‬
‫‪3:27:49‬‬
‫‪2010-04-26‬‬
‫‪HT905TAW-AL_DARELLK_ARA_9712.indd 48‬‬
HT905TAW-AL_DARELLK_ARA_9712.indd 49
2010-04-26
3:27:49
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertisement